toshiba e-studio 163-165-203 code technical reference

268
05/08 CODE TECHNICAL REFERENCE MULTIFUNCTIONAL DIGIAL SYSTEMS e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 File No. SME06002800 R060821C5100-TTEC Ver00_2006-12

Upload: bagrak51

Post on 25-Oct-2014

545 views

Category:

Documents


21 download

TRANSCRIPT

Page 1: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

05/08 CODE TECHNICAL REFERENCEMULTIFUNCTIONAL DIGIAL SYSTEMS

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205

File No. SME06002800R060821C5100-TTECVer00_2006-12

Page 2: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

Under the copyright laws, this manual cannot be reproduced in any form without prior written permission of TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION. No patent liability is assumed, however, with respect to the use of the information contained herein.

Page 3: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

Introduction

The 05/08 Code Technical Reference lists the codes in adjustment mode 05 and setting mode 08 for the e-STUDIO163/165/203/205. It addresses their purposes, specific descriptions and timing. This doc-ument is intended to facilitate your understanding of the code functions and increase customer satisfac-tion.

Precautions in ServicingFor the codes used by the service technician, the cautions mentioned in the Service Handbook must be stringently followed. The adjustments must be performed by a qualified service technician who has completed the service training course.

WarningPlease handle any confidential information included in this manual with appropriate care.If you fail to do so, you may be punished according to law.

Manual Format:The manual consists as follows.

* 05/08 codes are basically explained in the numerical order. However, they are not always in an order because several codes are provided for items that are described by function.

Destination:The destinations described in this Technical Reference are as follows.

Introduction Destination Explains the expression of destination in this book.

How to read 05/08 code This code explains the written item and its con-tent for each 05 and 08 code.

Code table by category Adjustment mode 05 and setting mode 08 are listed individually on a code table by category. This code table is convenient for searching a desired code. It is possible to jump from this table to the item in the body of this book directly.

1. 05 Adjustment Code Explains each 05 adjustment code.2. 08 Setting Code Explains each 08 setting code.

Notation Actual destination ReferenceEUR ASD: Asia

AUD: AustraliaCND: ChinaMJD: EuropeSAD/ASU: Saudi ArabiaKRD: KoreaARD: Latin AmericaTWD: Taiwan

As a classification of destinations, when EUR is written, this signifies the entire desti-nation except UC and JPN, unless other-wise written.

UC NAD: North AmericaJPN JPD/FJP: Japan

Page 4: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

How to Read 05/08 Codes:Following items are explained for each code.

[05 Adjustment Code]

[08 Setting Code]

Item ContentCode Number The number of a 05 adjustment codeCode Name The name of a codePurpose Explains the purpose of the code.Description Explains the adjustment content.

Codes are divided roughly into 2 categories.1. Codes, which execute only adjustment.2. Codes, which execute after selecting the adjustment value.

These codes contain the default and the adjustment acceptable value.* For detailed adjustment procedures, refer to the Service Handbook [2.2.4 Adjustment mode (05)].

Adjustment Timing Explains the adjustment timing.Principle Explains the adjustment principle for the code that needs a specific explanation.Caution Explains the caution.

Perform the adjustment after reading the caution.Important information including adjustment conditions (which order of codes to perform adjustment) is written in this section.

Item ContentCode Number The number of a 08 setting codeCode Name The name of a codePurpose Explains the purpose of the code.Description Explains the setting content.

Codes are divided roughly into 2 categories.1. Codes, which execute only setting.2. Codes, which execute after selecting the setting value.

These codes contain selectable options.* For detailed setting procedures, refer to the Service Handbook [2.2.5 Setting mode (08)].

Setting Timing Explains the setting timing.Caution Explains the caution.

Perform the setting after reading the caution.Important information including restrictions on settings is written in this section.

Page 5: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

CONTENTSe-STUDIO163/165/203/205

1. Code Table by Category.............................................................................................. 1-1[05 Adjustment Code] .......................................................................................................... 1-1[08 Setting Code] ................................................................................................................. 1-2

2. Code in Adjustment Mode 05 ..................................................................................... 2-1List of 05 Adjustment Code.................................................................................................. 2-105-200/201 .......................................................................................................................... 2-305-205 ................................................................................................................................. 2-405-210 ................................................................................................................................. 2-505-220 to 222 ...................................................................................................................... 2-605-233 to 235 ...................................................................................................................... 2-705-247/270 .......................................................................................................................... 2-805-248 ................................................................................................................................. 2-905-280 ............................................................................................................................... 2-1005-286 ............................................................................................................................... 2-1105-305 ............................................................................................................................... 2-1205-306 ............................................................................................................................... 2-1305-310 ............................................................................................................................... 2-1405-311 to 313 .................................................................................................................... 2-1505-340 ............................................................................................................................... 2-1605-350/351 ........................................................................................................................ 2-1705-354/355 ........................................................................................................................ 2-1805-357 ............................................................................................................................... 2-1905-358 ............................................................................................................................... 2-2005-359 ............................................................................................................................... 2-2105-365/366 ........................................................................................................................ 2-2205-401/405/1300 ............................................................................................................... 2-2305-410/411/498 ................................................................................................................. 2-2505-421/422 ........................................................................................................................ 2-2705-424/425 ........................................................................................................................ 2-2905-430 to 438 .................................................................................................................... 2-3005-440 to 445 .................................................................................................................... 2-3205-448 to 451/455/458/460 to 463/474 ............................................................................. 2-3405-464 ............................................................................................................................... 2-3705-466 ............................................................................................................................... 2-3805-497 ............................................................................................................................... 2-3905-501/503/504/700/710/714/845 to 847 .......................................................................... 2-4105-505 to 507/701/715/719/850 to 852 ............................................................................. 2-4205-508 to 510/702/720/724/855 to 857 ............................................................................. 2-4305-512/514/515/725/729/860 to 862 ................................................................................. 2-4405-532 to 534/835 to 837 .................................................................................................. 2-4505-535 to 537/820 to 822 .................................................................................................. 2-4605-570 to 572/693 to 695/825 to 827/830 to 832 .............................................................. 2-4705-593 to 595 .................................................................................................................... 2-4805-596 to 599 .................................................................................................................... 2-4905-600 to 602/869 to 871 .................................................................................................. 2-5005-609 ............................................................................................................................... 2-5105-620 to 623/865 to 867 .................................................................................................. 2-5205-648/654/655 ................................................................................................................. 2-5305-664/665 ........................................................................................................................ 2-5405-667/672/676/678 .......................................................................................................... 2-55

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 CONTENTS

1

Page 6: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3. Code in Setting Mode 08 ............................................................................................. 3-1List of 08 Setting Code ........................................................................................................ 3-108-202 ................................................................................................................................. 3-608-203 ................................................................................................................................. 3-708-204 ................................................................................................................................. 3-808-205 ................................................................................................................................. 3-908-206 ............................................................................................................................... 3-1008-209 ............................................................................................................................... 3-1108-219 ............................................................................................................................... 3-1208-224 to 228 .................................................................................................................... 3-1308-229 to 242/244/245/337 to 341/471 ............................................................................. 3-1408-246 ............................................................................................................................... 3-1508-250 ............................................................................................................................... 3-1608-251 ............................................................................................................................... 3-1708-252 ............................................................................................................................... 3-1808-253 ............................................................................................................................... 3-1908-254 ............................................................................................................................... 3-2108-255 ............................................................................................................................... 3-2208-258 ............................................................................................................................... 3-2308-260 ............................................................................................................................... 3-2408-261 ............................................................................................................................... 3-2508-263 ............................................................................................................................... 3-2608-265 ............................................................................................................................... 3-2708-266 ............................................................................................................................... 3-2808-273 ............................................................................................................................... 3-2908-274 ............................................................................................................................... 3-3008-276 ............................................................................................................................... 3-3108-281 ............................................................................................................................... 3-3208-283 ............................................................................................................................... 3-3308-284 ............................................................................................................................... 3-3408-285 ............................................................................................................................... 3-3508-286 ............................................................................................................................... 3-3608-290 to 293/296 to 299/978/979 .................................................................................... 3-3708-300 ............................................................................................................................... 3-4008-305 to 308 .................................................................................................................... 3-4108-312 to 314 .................................................................................................................... 3-4308-315/316 ........................................................................................................................ 3-4508-320 to 323 .................................................................................................................... 3-4608-327 to 329 .................................................................................................................... 3-4708-330/332 ........................................................................................................................ 3-4808-335 ............................................................................................................................... 3-4908-345 ............................................................................................................................... 3-5008-346 ............................................................................................................................... 3-5108-347/353 ........................................................................................................................ 3-5208-348/349 ........................................................................................................................ 3-5308-352 ............................................................................................................................... 3-5408-356 to 358/360/370/372/374/1411 ............................................................................... 3-5508-361/1150/1158/1172/1174/1182/1198/1200/1214/1224/1246/1250/1268/1298/1300/1312/

1314/1316/1320/1322/1328/1330/1332/1336 .............................................................. 3-5608-381 ............................................................................................................................... 3-5908-388/389 ........................................................................................................................ 3-6008-400 ............................................................................................................................... 3-6108-404/405 ........................................................................................................................ 3-6208-407/411 ........................................................................................................................ 3-6308-409/448 ........................................................................................................................ 3-64

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 CONTENTS © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2

Page 7: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-410/413/437/438/450 to 453/520/521 .......................................................................... 3-6508-414 ............................................................................................................................... 3-6608-424/425 ........................................................................................................................ 3-6708-433/800/801/802/804/896 ............................................................................................ 3-6808-439 to 441/523/526 ...................................................................................................... 3-6908-455 ............................................................................................................................... 3-7008-462 ............................................................................................................................... 3-7108-463 ............................................................................................................................... 3-7308-476/536/537/539 .......................................................................................................... 3-7408-480 ............................................................................................................................... 3-7608-481 ............................................................................................................................... 3-7708-482 ............................................................................................................................... 3-7808-483 ............................................................................................................................... 3-7908-486 ............................................................................................................................... 3-8008-502 ............................................................................................................................... 3-8108-510 ............................................................................................................................... 3-8208-515/516 ........................................................................................................................ 3-8308-525/527/540/541 .......................................................................................................... 3-8408-535 ............................................................................................................................... 3-8608-538 ............................................................................................................................... 3-8708-550 ............................................................................................................................... 3-8808-603 ............................................................................................................................... 3-8908-604 ............................................................................................................................... 3-9008-611 ............................................................................................................................... 3-9108-615 ............................................................................................................................... 3-9208-617 ............................................................................................................................... 3-9308-618 ............................................................................................................................... 3-9408-631 ............................................................................................................................... 3-9508-638 ............................................................................................................................... 3-9608-641 ............................................................................................................................... 3-9708-642 ............................................................................................................................... 3-9808-649 ............................................................................................................................... 3-9908-650 ............................................................................................................................. 3-10108-655 ............................................................................................................................. 3-10208-660/661 ...................................................................................................................... 3-10308-666 ............................................................................................................................. 3-10408-669 ............................................................................................................................. 3-10508-672 ............................................................................................................................. 3-10608-684/686 ...................................................................................................................... 3-10708-685 ............................................................................................................................. 3-10808-690 ............................................................................................................................. 3-10908-691 ............................................................................................................................. 3-11008-693 ............................................................................................................................. 3-11108-695 ............................................................................................................................. 3-11208-698 ............................................................................................................................. 3-11308-699 ............................................................................................................................. 3-11408-702/703/707/710/711/715 to 721/723/726 to 730/772/773/780 to 790/796 ............... 3-11508-712/713/714 ............................................................................................................... 3-11808-767 to 771/775 to 778 ................................................................................................ 3-11908-805 to 809/814/818/819/826/864 to 867 .................................................................... 3-12008-830/868/869 ............................................................................................................... 3-12208-831/870/871 ............................................................................................................... 3-12308-833 to 837/840/857 to 863 ......................................................................................... 3-12408-838 ............................................................................................................................. 3-12608-839 ............................................................................................................................. 3-127

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 CONTENTS

3

Page 8: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-872/873/875 to 877/883/884 ...................................................................................... 3-12808-886 ............................................................................................................................. 3-12908-900/906 ...................................................................................................................... 3-13008-905 ............................................................................................................................. 3-13108-921/1951 ....................................................................................................................3-13208-922/923 ...................................................................................................................... 3-13308-945 ............................................................................................................................. 3-13408-947 ............................................................................................................................. 3-13508-949 ............................................................................................................................. 3-13608-970 ............................................................................................................................. 3-13708-971 ............................................................................................................................. 3-13808-973 ............................................................................................................................. 3-13908-995 ............................................................................................................................. 3-14008-1002 ........................................................................................................................... 3-14108-1003 ........................................................................................................................... 3-14208-1006 to 1010/1112 ..................................................................................................... 3-14308-1011/1012 .................................................................................................................. 3-14408-1013 ........................................................................................................................... 3-14508-1014/1015/1103 to 1105 ............................................................................................ 3-14608-1017 to 1019 .............................................................................................................. 3-14708-1020 ........................................................................................................................... 3-14808-1024/1025 .................................................................................................................. 3-14908-1026 to 1029 .............................................................................................................. 3-15008-1030 to 1032 .............................................................................................................. 3-15108-1037 to 1045/1100 to 1102/1111 ............................................................................... 3-15208-1046 to 1052/1097/1098 ............................................................................................ 3-15408-1055 ........................................................................................................................... 3-15508-1063/1065/1066/1069/1070/1099 .............................................................................. 3-15608-1073/1074 .................................................................................................................. 3-15808-1075 to 1077 .............................................................................................................. 3-15908-1078 to 1088 .............................................................................................................. 3-16008-1093 to 1096 .............................................................................................................. 3-16208-1114 ........................................................................................................................... 3-16308-1123 ........................................................................................................................... 3-16408-1124 ........................................................................................................................... 3-16508-1141 ........................................................................................................................... 3-16608-1144 ........................................................................................................................... 3-16708-1149 ........................................................................................................................... 3-16808-1372 ........................................................................................................................... 3-16908-1378 ........................................................................................................................... 3-17008-1380 ........................................................................................................................... 3-17108-1382 ........................................................................................................................... 3-17208-1385/1386/1388 ......................................................................................................... 3-17308-1410 ........................................................................................................................... 3-17408-1428 ........................................................................................................................... 3-17508-1440 ........................................................................................................................... 3-17608-1447 ........................................................................................................................... 3-17708-1448 ........................................................................................................................... 3-17808-1449 ........................................................................................................................... 3-17908-1450 ........................................................................................................................... 3-18008-1451 ........................................................................................................................... 3-18108-1628 ........................................................................................................................... 3-18208-1882 ........................................................................................................................... 3-18308-1913 ........................................................................................................................... 3-18408-1952 to 1955 .............................................................................................................. 3-185

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 CONTENTS © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

4

Page 9: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-1960 to 1979 .............................................................................................................. 3-18608-1989 ........................................................................................................................... 3-18708-1990 ........................................................................................................................... 3-18808-1991 ........................................................................................................................... 3-18908-1993 ........................................................................................................................... 3-19008-1994 ........................................................................................................................... 3-19108-1996 ........................................................................................................................... 3-192

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 CONTENTS

5

Page 10: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 CONTENTS © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

6

Page 11: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

1

1. Code Table by Category

2

2. Code in Adjustment Mode 05

3

3. Code in Setting Mode 08

Page 12: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference
Page 13: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

1

1. Code Table by Category05 adjustment code and 08 setting code are provided by the category in the table.There are category names only for 05 adjustment code and 08 setting code and common for both codes.

[05 Adjustment Code]

Category Sub category 05 Adjustment Code Refer to pageADF/RADF Aligning amount 05-354/355 2-18

Transporting 05-357 2-1905-358 2-2005-365/366 2-22

Image Image density 05-501/503/504/700/710/714/845 to 847 2-4105-505 to 507/701/715/719/850 to 852 2-4205-508 to 510/702/720/724/855 to 857 2-4305-512/514/515/725/729/860 to 862 2-44

Printer density 05-667/672/676/678 2-55Gamma table 05-609 2-51Gamma balance 05-596 to 599 2-49Gamma slope 05-593 to 595 2-48Background adjust-ment

05-600 to 602/869 to 871 2-50

Sharpness 05-620 to 623/865 to 867 2-52Smudged/Faint text 05-648/654/655 2-53Toner saving 05-664/665 2-54Margin 05-430 to 438 2-30Range correction 05-532 to 534/835 to 837 2-45

05-535 to 537/820 to 822 2-4605-570 to 572/693 to 695/825 to 827/830 to 832 2-47

Paper feeding Paper pushing amount

05-466 2-38

Aligning amount 05-448 to 451/455/458/460 to 463/474 2-34Drive Exit motor 05-424/425 2-29

Main motor 05-421/422 2-27Development Auto-toner 05-200/201 2-3

Developer bias 05-247/270 2-8Temperature 05-205 2-4Drum temperature 05-248 2-9

Scanner LED 05-311 to 313 2-15Position 05-305 2-12

05-306 2-13Carriage position 05-359 2-21Shading position 05-350/351 2-17Reproduction ratio 05-340 2-16Peak 05-310 2-14

Charger Main charger bias 05-210 2-5Transfer Transfer bias 05-220 to 222 2-6Separation Separation bias 05-233 to 235 2-7Process Toner recycle 05-280 2-10Laser Write starting 05-410/411/498 2-25

05-440 to 445 2-32

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code Table by Category

1 - 1

Page 14: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

[08 Setting Code]

Category Sub category 08 Setting Code Refer to pageRADF Duplex copying 08-685 3-108Counter Scan count 08-312 to 314 3-43

08-327 to 329 3-47Double count 08-345 3-50

08-347/353 3-5208-348/349 3-5308-352 3-54

Total counter copy 08-388/389 3-60Total number of pages

08-335 3-49

Toner cartridge 08-1410 3-174Transmitted/Received pages in FAX

08-315/316 3-4508-330/332 3-48

Number of output pages

08-305 to 308 3-4108-320 to 323 3-46

External counter 08-381 3-59Paper source 08-356 to 358/360/370/372/374/1411 3-55Media type 08-1385/1386/1388 3-173Fuser unit 08-1372 3-169

08-1378 3-17008-1380 3-17108-1382 3-172

Scanner Control status 08-463 3-73Transmitting E-mail 08-273 3-29Memory full 08-1144 3-167

Data clear SRAM 08-1428 3-175Network AppleTalk 08-1014/1015/1103 to 1105 3-146

NetWare 08-1026 to 1029 3-150SNMP 08-1063/1065/1066/1069/1070/1099 3-156DDNS 08-1020 3-148DNS 08-1017 to 1019 3-147POP3 08-1046 to 1052/1097/1098 3-154E-mail 08-265 3-27Enable server's 08-1989 3-187

08-1990 3-18808-1991 3-18908-1993 3-19008-1994 3-19108-1996 3-192

FTP 08-1055 3-155HTTP 08-1030 to 1032 3-151IP Conflict 08-1440 3-176IP Filter 08-1960 to 1979 3-186TCP/IP 08-1006 to 1010/1112 3-143IPX/SPX 08-1011/1012 3-144LPD 08-1075 to 1077 3-159MAC address 08-1141 3-166NCP 08-1013 3-145

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code Table by Category © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1 - 2

Page 15: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

1

Network NIC 08-1002 3-141

08-1003 3-142NetWare printing 08-1093 to 1096 3-162NT domain 08-1123 3-164PCL 08-973 3-139SMTP 08-1037 to 1045/1100 to 1102/1111 3-152Raw TCP 08-1073/1074 3-158Raw Port 08-945 3-134Raw printing 08-290 to 293/296 to 299/978/979 3-37Web data 08-260 3-24WINS 08-1024/1025 3-149Internet FAX 08-266 3-28

08-274 3-3008-1114 3-163

Workgroup name 08-1124 3-165Automatic transfer 08-660/661 3-103

Version FROM 08-921/1951 3-132System/PFC 08-900/906 3-130Controller ROM / Scan ROM

08-1952 to 1955 3-185

Function table data / language data

08-922/923 3-133

Fax Automatic transfer 08-510 3-82Image processing LED flashing 08-1913 3-184

Auto-toner 08-455 3-70Toner recycle 08-838 3-126Drum life correction 08-1628 3-182Temperature/Humidity

08-839 3-127

Maintenance FSMS 08-258 3-23RDMS 08-702/703/707/710/711/715 to 721/723/726 to

730/772/773/780 to 790/7963-115

PM 08-251 3-1708-252 3-1808-361/1150/1158/1172/1174/1182/1198/1200/1214/1224/1246/1250/1268/1298/1300/1312/1314/1316/1320/1322/1328/1330/1332/1336

3-56

Error history 08-253 3-19Telephone number 08-250 3-16Service notification 08-767 to 771/775 to 778 3-119Equipment number 08-995 3-140

Laser Polygonal motor 08-483 3-7908-486 3-80

Laser power 08-872/873/875 to 877/883/884 3-128Image Error diffusion /

dither08-502 3-81

Default setting 08-538 3-8708-550 3-88

Category Sub category 08 Setting Code Refer to page

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code Table by Category

1 - 3

Page 16: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

Paper feeding Change of paper source

08-481 3-77

Retry 08-482 3-78Paper feeding 08-254 3-21

08-255 3-22Default setting 08-480 3-76Paper exit 08-698 3-113

08-699 3-114Paper size 08-224 to 228 3-13Paper dimension 08-229 to 242/244/245/337 to 341/471 3-14

Development Auto-toner[ 08-414 3-66Developer bias 08-833 to 837/840/857 to 863 3-124

User interface X in 1 08-650 3-101Custom mode 08-631 3-95Copy volume 08-300 3-40Job clear 08-246 3-15Energy saving mode

08-970 3-137

Sorting 08-641 3-9708-649 3-99

Timer 08-204 3-808-205 3-908-206 3-10

Template 08-691 3-110File 08-209 3-11

08-219 3-12Book type 08-611 3-91External counter 08-202 3-6Administrator 08-263 3-26Default setting 08-276 3-31

08-281 3-3208-283 3-3308-284 3-3408-285 3-3508-286 3-3608-603 3-8908-604 3-9008-618 3-9408-642 3-98

Department man-agement

08-617 3-93

Paper size 08-261 3-25

Category Sub category 08 Setting Code Refer to page

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code Table by Category © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1 - 4

Page 17: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

1

General Enhanced bold 08-1149 3-168

All clear 08-669 3-105Reset 08-655 3-102Database 08-684/686 3-107Toner cartridge check

08-695 3-112

Nearly empty 08-971 3-138Partition 08-666 3-104Page setting 08-949 3-136Memory 08-615 3-92Equipment adjust-ment mode

08-203 3-7

Initialization 08-690 3-10908-693 3-11108-947 3-13508-1882 3-183

Time differences 08-638 3-96Restriction to 250 sheets exiting

08-712/713/714 3-118

Department man-agement

08-672 3-106

Main charger bias Main charger bias 08-805 to 809/814/818/819/826/864 to 867 3-120Fuser Pre-running 08-439 to 441/523/526 3-69

Temperature 08-404/405 3-6208-407/411 3-6308-409/448 3-6408-410/413/437/438/450 to 453/520/521 3-6508-424/425 3-6708-433/800/801/802/804/896 3-6808-476/536/537/539 3-7408-515/516 3-8308-525/527/540/541 3-8408-535 3-86

Status counter 08-400 3-61Transfer bias Transfer bias 08-830/868/869 3-122SEparation bias Separation bias 08-831/870/871 3-123

Category Sub category 08 Setting Code Refer to page

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code Table by Category

1 - 5

Page 18: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code Table by Category © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

1 - 6

Page 19: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

2

2. Code in Adjustment Mode 05

List of 05 Adjustment Code

Code Content Page05-200/201 Automatic Adjustment of Auto-Toner Sensor 2-305-205 Developer Bias Output Adjustment 2-405-210 Main Charger Grid Bias Output Adjustment 2-505-220 to 222 Transfer DC Output Adjustment 2-605-233 to 235 Separation DC Output Adjustment 2-705-247/270 Temperature/Humidity Sensor Temperature/

Humidity Display2-8

05-248 Drum Thermistor Temperature Display 2-905-280 Enforced Performing of Toner Recycle Idle 2-1005-286 Laser Power Adjustment 2-1105-305 Image Location Adjustment of Scanner Secondary

Scanning Direction2-12

05-306 Image Location Adjustment of Scanner Primary Scanning Direction

2-13

05-310 Forced Performing of Peak Detection 2-1405-311 to 313 R / B / YG-LED Current Actual Value Setting 2-1505-340 Reproduction Ratio Adjustment of Scanner Sec-

ondary Scanning2-16

05-350/351 Shading Position Adjustment 2-1705-354/355 ADF/RADF Paper Aligning Amount Adjustment 2-1805-357 Fine Adjustment of ADF/RADF Transport Speed 2-1905-358 ADF/RADF Side Deviation Adjustment 2-2005-359 CIS Unit Position Adjustment during Scanning

from ADF/RADF2-21

05-365/366 Image Location Adjustment of Scanner Primary Scanning Direction (When the ADF/RADF is Used)

2-22

05-401/405/1300 Reproduction Ratio Adjustment of Primary Scan-ning Direction (Fine Adjustment of Polygonal Motor Rotation Speed)

2-23

05-410/411/498 Adjustment of Primary Scanning Laser Writing Start Position

2-25

05-421/422 Reproduction Ratio Adjustment of Secondary Scanning Direction (Fine Adjustment of Main Motor Rotation Speed)

2-27

05-424/425 Fine Adjustment of Exit Motor Rotation Speed 2-2905-430 to 438 Margin Adjustment 2-3005-440 to 445 Adjustment of Secondary Scanning Laser Writing

Start Position2-32

05-448 to 451/455/458/460 to 463/474 Aligning Amount Adjustment 2-3405-464 Aligning Amount Adjustment (Envelope) 2-3705-466 Adjustment of Pushing Amount from Behind 2-3805-497 Adjustment of Drawer Sideways Deviation 2-3905-501/503/504/700/710/714/845 to 847 Density Adjustment "Manual Density" Fine Adjust-

ment (Center Setting) (Copy/FAX/Scanner Func-tion)

2-41

05-505 to 507/701/715/719/850 to 852 Density Adjustment "Manual Density" Fine Adjust-ment (Lighter Setting) (Copy/FAX/Scanner Func-tion)

2-42

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 1

Page 20: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

05-508 to 510/702/720/724/855 to 857 Density Adjustment "Manual Density" Fine Adjust-ment (Darker Setting) (Copy/FAX/Scanner Func-tion)

2-43

05-512/514/515/725/729/860 to 862 Density Adjustment "Automatic Density" Fine Adjustment (Copy/FAX/Scanner Function)

2-44

05-532 to 534/835 to 837 Range Correction Background Peak Adjustment (Copy/Scanner Function)

2-45

05-535 to 537/820 to 822 Range Correction Text Peak Adjustment (Copy/Scanner Function)

2-46

05-570 to 572/693 to 695/825 to 827/830 to 832 Range Correction (Copy/Scan Function) 2-4705-593 to 595 Gamma Data Slope Correction (Copy Function) 2-4805-596 to 599 Gamma Balance Adjustment (Printer Function) 2-4905-600 to 602/869 to 871 Background Adjustment (Copy/Scanner Function) 2-5005-609 Switching of Gamma Correction Table (Copy/FAX/

Scanner Function)2-51

05-620 to 623/865 to 867 Sharpness Adjustment (Copy/Scanner Function) 2-5205-648/654/655 Adjustment of Smudged/Faint Text (Copy/Printer

Function)2-53

05-664/665 Upper Limit in Toner Saving Mode (Printer Func-tion)

2-54

05-667/672/676/678 Adjustment of Image Density (Copy/Printer/FAX Function)

2-55

Code Content Page

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 2

Page 21: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

2

05-200/201

Automatic Adjustment of Auto-Toner Sensor

PurposeWhen code 05-200 is performed, it automatically corrects the sensitivity of the auto-toner sensor. This allows the toner density in the developer material to be measured accurately. Code 05-201 is used to adjust the automatic adjustment value acquired from code 05-200.

The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:

DescriptionWhen code 05-200 is performed, the sensitivity of the auto-toner sensor is automatically adjusted. This automatically adjusts the output voltage of the sensor so that the toner density in the developer material can be detected appropriately. The adjustment requires approximately two minutes.When the value displayed on the control panel is not within the range of 232 to 248 (the auto-toner sen-sor output is 2.32 to 2.48) after code 05-200 is performed, a value must be entered within the specified value, by using the [ZOOM] ([25%] or [200%]) button for the e-STUDIO163, or the [Up] or [Down] but-ton for the e-STUDIO165/205 on the control panel.For further information, refer to 3.1 [Adjustment of Auto-toner Sensor] in the Service Handbook.

By adjusting code 05-201, the automatic adjustment value of the auto-toner sensor acquired from per-forming code 05-200 can be corrected. As the set value is increased, the toner density in the developer material and the printing density become higher. On the other hand, as the set value is decreased, the toner density in the developer material and the printing density become lower.

05-201:* Default: 141* Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Minimum sensor output, 255: Maximum sensor output)

Adjustment TimingUse these codes when replacing the developer material.

Caution• Perform this adjustment with the developer unit filled with only the developer material (with no toner

cartridge loaded, as well as no toner left in the cleaner unit). The equipment adopts the toner recycle system. Therefore, when recycled toner left in the cleaner unit is transferred, proper adjustment can-not be performed.)

• Adjustment of the toner density in the toner developer material should usually be performed by "Toner density correction (08-414)" instead of code 05-201.

Code Applied to05-200 Automatic adjustment of auto-toner sensor05-201 Automatic adjustment output value correction of auto-toner sensor

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 3

Page 22: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

05-205

Developer Bias Output Adjustment

PurposeWhen the high-voltage transformer is replaced, the condition of toner amount adhered onto the photo-conductive drum changes because the transformer characteristics vary. Therefore, when replacing the high-voltage transformer, it is necessary to adjust the developer bias output with this code.When replacing the high-voltage transformer, the developer bias output adjustment and the following adjustments must be performed at the same time.• Main charger grid bias output adjustment (05-210)• Transfer DC output adjustment (05-220 to 222)• Separation DC output adjustment (05-233 to 235)

DescriptionWhen the set value is changed, the negative DC voltage of the developer bias, which is output from the high-voltage transformer, is reset. As the set value is increased, the developer bias output voltage becomes higher (or more negative) and the amount of toner attracted from the developer sleeve (mag-netic roller) onto the latent image, which is formed on the drum, is increased. This results in the higher density of copy outputs. On the other hand, as the set value is decreased, the developer bias output voltage becomes lower and the amount of toner attracted onto the latent image, which is formed on the drum, is decreased. This results in the lower density of copy outputs.For further information, refer to 3.6 [Adjustment of High-Voltage Transformer] in the Service Handbook.

* Default: 05-220: 165, 05-221: 179, 05-222: 126* Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Minimum density, 255: Maximum density)

Adjustment Timing• When replacing the high-voltage transformer• If an avatar phenomenon occurs• If poor transfer occurs

Caution• Perform this adjustment with the process unit (cleaner and developer) being removed.• The digital tester, high-voltage transformer adjustment jig, and cover open switch release jig for ser-

vice are required to adjust these codes.• Decrease the transfer DC output value, if the avatar phenomenon occurs at the halftone area. Note

that when the transfer DC output value is decreased too much, poor transfer may occur.• Increase the transfer DC output value, if poor transfer occurs regardless of the charger wire being

soiled. Note that the avatar phenomenon occurs when the transfer DC output is increased too much. Therefore, use thick paper mode to use thick paper.

• By using the following codes, the transfer DC output values set by codes 05-220 to 222 are cor-rected to choose the appropriate printing condition.- Transfer DC output correction value when duplex printing (08-491 to 493)- Transfer DC correction (08-830/868/869)

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 4

Page 23: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

2

05-210

Main Charger Grid Bias Output Adjustment

PurposeThis code is used to adjust the negative DC voltage of the main charger grid bias output from the high voltage transformer.

DescriptionWhen the set value is changed, the negative DC voltage of the main charger grid bias, which is output from the high-voltage transformer, is reset. As the set value is increased, the main charger grid voltage becomes higher (or more negative) and the main charger voltage potential on the drum surface becomes higher (or more negative). Then the amount of toner attracted onto the latent image, which is formed on the drum, is decreased. This results in the lower density of copy outputs. On the other hand, as the set value is decreased, the main charger grid voltage becomes lower and the main charger volt-age potential on the drum surface becomes lower. Then the amount of toner attracted onto the latent image, which is formed on the drum, is increased. This results in the higher density of copy outputs.For further information, refer to 3.6 [Adjustment of High-Voltage Transformer] in the Service Handbook.

* Default: 78* Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Minimum density, 255: Maximum density)

Adjustment TimingUse this code when replacing the high-voltage transformer.

Caution• Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.• Perform this adjustment with the process unit (cleaner and developer) being removed.• The digital tester, high-voltage transformer adjustment jig, and cover open switch release jig for ser-

vice are required to adjust this code.• By using "Main charger bias correction (08-805 to 809/826/864 to 867), the main charger grid bias

output value set by code 05-210 is corrected by operation mode and original mode so that the opti-mal printing density can be set.

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 5

Page 24: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

05-220 to 222

Transfer DC Output Adjustment

PurposeWhen the high-voltage transformer is replaced, the toner transfer condition from the drum to paper changes because the transformer characteristics vary. Therefore, when replacing the high-voltage transformer, it is necessary to adjust the transfer DC output with these codes. The adjustment is applied each to the leading edge, center and trailing edge of the paper. When replacing the high-voltage trans-former, the transfer DC output adjustment and the following adjustments must be performed at the same time.• Developer bias output adjustment (05-205)• Main charger grid bias output adjustment (05-210)• Separation DC output adjustment (05-233 to 235)

The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:

DescriptionAs the set value is increased, the transfer current becomes higher (or more positive) and the main charger voltage potential of the paper surface becomes higher (or more positive). The amount of toner transferred from the drum onto the paper is increased and the printing density becomes higher. On the other hand, as the set value is decreased, the transfer current becomes lower. The amount of toner transferred from the drum onto the paper is decreased and the printing density becomes lower.For further information, refer to 3.6 [Adjustment of High-Voltage Transformer] in the Service Handbook.

* Default: 05-220: 128, 05-221: 141, 05-222: 108* Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Minimum density, 255: Maximum density)

Adjustment Timing• When replacing the high-voltage transformer.• When an avatar is seen.• When poor transfer occurs.

Caution• Perform this adjustment with the process unit (cleaner and developer) being removed.• A digital tester and a high-voltage transformer adjustment jig are required.• Decrease the transfer DC output value when an avatar is seen at the halftone area. Note that when

the transfer DC output value is decreased too much, poor transfer could occur.• Increase the transfer DC output value when poor transfer occurs regardless of the charger wire

being soiled. Note that the avatar phenomenon occurs when the transfer DC output is increased too much. Therefore, when using thick paper, thick paper mode should be used.

• By using the following setting codes, the transfer DC output values set by these codes are corrected to choose the appropriate printing condition.- Transfer DC output correction value when duplex printing (08-491 to 493)- Transfer DC correction (08-830/868/869)

Code Applied to05-220 Transfer DC output adjustment (H), range at approx. 11 mm from the leading edge of

paper05-221 Transfer DC output adjustment (C), center of paper05-222 Transfer DC output adjustment (L), range at approx. 5 mm from the trailing edge of paper

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 6

Page 25: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

2

05-233 to 235

Separation DC Output Adjustment

PurposeWhen the high-voltage transformer is replaced, the DC voltage value to separate paper from the drum changes because the transformer characteristics vary. Therefore, when replacing the high-voltage transformer, it is necessary to adjust the separation DC output by using these codes. The adjustment is applied each to the leading edge, center and trailing edge of the paper. When replacing the high-volt-age transformer, the separation DC output adjustment and the following adjustments must be per-formed at the same time.• Developer bias output adjustment (05-205)• Main charger grid bias output adjustment (05-210)• Transfer DC output adjustment (05-220 to 222)

The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:

DescriptionAs the set value is increased, the DC voltage is increased and positive charges on the paper are decreased; therefore, the separation is easier to be performed. On the other hand, as the set value is decreased, the DC voltage is decreased and the ratio of the positive charges on the paper decreasing is reduced; therefore, the separation is more difficult to be performed.For further information, refer to 3.6 [Adjustment of High-Voltage Transformer] in the Service Handbook.

* Default: 05-233: 55, 05-234: 55, 05-235: 36* Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Separation is more difficult, 255: separation is easier)

Adjustment Timing• When replacing the high-voltage transformer• If poor paper separation occurs• If poor transfer (avatar phenomenon) occurs

Caution• Perform this adjustment with the process unit (cleaner and developer) being removed.• The digital tester, high-voltage transformer adjustment jig, and cover open switch release jig for ser-

vice are required to adjust these codes.• Increase the separation DC output, if poor paper separation occurs regardless of the charger wire

being soiled or if thin paper is used frequently. Note that poor transfer (avatar phenomenon) occurs when the separation DC output is increased too much.

• If poor transfer (avatar phenomenon) occurs, decrease the separation DC output value. Note that when the separation output value is decreased too much, paper separation ability decreases.

• By using the following codes, the separation DC output values set by codes 05-233 to 235 are cor-rected to choose the appropriate printing condition.- Separation DC output correction (08-831/870/871)

Code Applied to05-233 Separation DC output adjustment (H), range at approx. 11 mm from the leading edge

of paper05-234 Separation DC output adjustment (C), center of paper05-235 Separation DC output adjustment (L), ranges at approx. 11 to 46 mm from the leading

edge of paper and at approx. 48 mm from the trailing edge of paper

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 7

Page 26: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

05-247/270

Temperature/Humidity Sensor Temperature/Humidity Display

PurposeThese codes are used to display the temperature and humidity of the environment where the equip-ment is installed.The temperature and humidity are detected through the temperature/humidity sensor installed on the left of the equipment.The displayed data is updated at the specific timing.These codes are used only to display the temperature or humidity, and no values can be set.

The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:

DescriptionWhen these codes are performed, the temperature and humidity detected through the temperature/humidity sensor are displayed. When the print operation is completed, the temperature and humidity data is retrieved and each display is updated.

* Default: 05-247: 50 (%), 05-270: 23 (°C)* Acceptable values: 0 to 100

Adjustment TimingUse these codes to check the temperature and humidity detected through the temperature/humidity sensor.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

Code Applied to05-247 Temperature/humidity sensor humidity display05-270 Temperature/humidity sensor temperature display

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 8

Page 27: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

2

05-248

Drum Thermistor Temperature Display

PurposeThis code is used to display the temperature of the drum surface.The temperature of the drum is detected through the drum thermistor installed in the developer unit.The displayed data is updated at the specific timing.This code is used only to display the temperature, and no values can be set.

DescriptionWhen this code is performed, the temperature of the drum detected through the drum thermistor is dis-played.When the print operation is completed, the temperature data is retrieved and the drum temperature dis-play is updated.

* Default: 23 (°C)* Acceptable values: 0 to 100

Adjustment TimingUse this code to check the temperature of the drum.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 9

Page 28: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

05-280

Enforced Performing of Toner Recycle Idle

PurposeThis code is used to idle the recovery toner supply mechanism and forcibly remove toner from the cleaner unit when replacing the developer material.

DescriptionWhen this code is performed, the recovery toner supply mechanism is idled and toner is forcibly removed from the cleaner unit.

Adjustment TimingPerform this adjustment, and then replace the developer material.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 10

Page 29: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

2

05-286

Laser Power Adjustment

PurposeLatent image is produced when the laser beam is irradiated onto the drum. This code is used to adjust the printing density by adjusting the output of the laser beam.

DescriptionAs the set value is increased, the laser output increases and the printing density becomes higher. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the laser output decreases and the printing density becomes lower.

* Default: 60* Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Minimum density, 255: Maximum density)

Adjustment TimingUse this code to adjust the printing density by changing the laser power.

Caution• Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.• By using "Laser power correction (08-872/873/875 to 877/883), the laser output value set by code

05-286 is corrected by operation mode and original mode so that the optimal printing density can be set.

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 11

Page 30: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

05-305

Image Location Adjustment of Scanner Secondary Scanning Direction

PurposeThis code is used to adjust the scan start position in the scanner secondary scanning direction, to fit in the proper position of the scanning range in the scanner secondary scanning direction.

DescriptionAs the set value is increased, the scanning range is shifted toward the end point of the scanner second-ary scanning direction. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the scanning range is shifted toward the start point of the scanner secondary scanning direction. On a printed sheet of paper, as the set value is increased, the image moves to the trailing edge of paper. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the image moves to the leading edge of paper.

* Default: 105* Acceptable values: 51 to 206 (51: Maximum to the leading edge of paper, 206: Maximum to the trail-

ing edge of paper)

* The shaded area indicates the read area of the original.

Adjustment TimingAfter the following parts are replaced, if there is a problem with a copy image and if the "image dimen-sional adjustment" is required, perform this adjustment:

- CIS unit

Caution• This adjustment requires a scale.• Be sure to follow the defined steps to perform the "image dimensional adjustment", including this

adjustment, as indicated below. Otherwise, the adjustment will not be properly performed.05-448 to 451, 455, 458, 460 to 464, 474 > 05-401 > 05-411 > 05-421 > 05-440 > 05-441 > 05-444 > 05-442 > 05-445 > 05-405 > 05-306 > 05-340 > 05-305 > 05-430 > 05-432 > 05-433 > 05-435 > 05-437 > 05-438 > 05-434* Codes 05-434, 444, 445, 448, 449, 450, 455, 474 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

When the set value is decreased Appropriate scanning position

Scanner secondary scanning direction

Scanning range

When the set value is increased

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 12

Page 31: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

2

05-306

Image Location Adjustment of Scanner Primary Scanning Direction

PurposeThis code is used to adjust the scan start position in the scanner primary scanning direction, to fit in the proper position of the scanning range in the scanner primary scanning direction.

DescriptionAs the set value is increased, the scanning range is shifted toward the end point of the scanner primary scanning direction. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the scanning range is shifted toward the start point of the scanner primary scanning direction. On a printed sheet of paper, as the set value is increased, the image moves to the front of paper. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the image moves to the rear of paper.

* Default: 127* Acceptable values: 121 to 136 (121: Maximum to the rear of paper, 136: Maximum to the front of

paper)

* The shaded area indicates the read area of the original.

Adjustment TimingAfter the following parts are replaced, if there is a problem with a printed image and if the "image dimen-sional adjustment" is required, perform this adjustment:

- CIS unit

Caution• This adjustment requires a scale.• Be sure to follow the defined steps to perform the "image dimensional adjustment", including this

adjustment, as indicated below. Otherwise, the adjustment will not be properly performed.05-448 to 451, 455, 458, 460 to 464, 474 > 05-401 > 05-411 > 05-421 > 05-440 > 05-441 > 05-444 > 05-442 > 05-445 > 05-405 > 05-306 > 05-340 > 05-305 > 05-430 > 05-432 > 05-433 > 05-435 > 05-437 > 05-438 > 05-434* Codes 05-434, 444, 445, 448, 449, 450, 455, 474 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

When the set value is decreased Appropriate scanning position

Sca

nner

prim

ary

scan

ning

dire

ctio

n

Scanning range

When the set value is increased

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 13

Page 32: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

05-310

Forced Performing of Peak Detection

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

PurposeThis code is used to absorb the variation in the amount of light emitted from the exposure light sources for each LED (R-LED, B-LED and YG-LED) installed on the CIS (Contact Image Sensor) Unit, due to individual differences and secular changes, to optimize the amount of light emitted through the life cycle of the equipment, and to ensure the color sensitivity when scanning an original.

DescriptionWhen this code is performed, each LED individually lights up and the amount of light emitted is auto-matically adjusted, and the adjusted current emission value is retained. Then, each LED lights up according to the retained current value.

Notes: Perform this code according to the following steps:1. Close the original cover, ADF or RADF.2. Enter this code in 05 ADJUSTMENT code. Then Press the [START] or [COPY] button.3. Automatic adjustment is performed as described below:

- The CIS unit moves.- After the equipment is suspended for a few seconds, the green light is emitted from the

light source for some ten seconds, and goes out for a moment.- The red light is emitted from the light source for a few seconds and goes out for a moment.- The blue light is emitted from the light source for a few seconds and goes out for a

moment.- The yellow light is emitted from the light source for a few seconds and goes out for a

moment.- The whitish green light is emitted from the light source for a few seconds, and then goes

out for a moment.- The whitish green light is emitted from the light source for some ten seconds, and then

goes out.4. Press the [CANCEL] button to finish the adjustment.* An error (C26) may occasionally occur during the adjustment. If the error occurs, refer to Cau-

tion to handle the error.

Adjustment TimingWhen replacing the CIS unit, MAIN board and SRAM board

CautionIf the error (C26) occurs when this code is performed, handle the error according to the following steps:1) Set the default values for codes 05-311, 312 and 313.2) Perform this code.

* In case the error occurs at this point, proceed with the next step.3) Turn the main switch OFF and ON to normally start up the equipment.* In case the error (C26) still occurs even after the above operations, replace the CIS unit and perform

this code again.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 14

Page 33: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

2

05-311 to 313

R / B / YG-LED Current Actual Value Setting

PurposeThese codes are used to adjust the current actual value for the exposure light source installed on the CIS (Contact Image Sensor) Unit.

The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:

DescriptionWhen this code is performed, the current actual value (current set initial value + light amount correction value) for each LED is changed.The default value is set at the same as the current set initial value for each LED (without correction).

* Default: 05-311: 76, 05-312: 62, 05-313: 160* Acceptable values: 0 to 255

Adjustment TimingNone.

CautionUse the above default value, unless otherwise required.

Code Applied to05-311 R-LED Current actual value adjustment (Light guide tube: main light source)05-312 B-LED Current actual value adjustment (Light guide tube: main light source)05-313 YG-LED Current actual value adjustment (LED alley: sub light source)

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 15

Page 34: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

05-340

Reproduction Ratio Adjustment of Scanner Secondary Scanning

PurposeThis code is used to adjust the scan speed in the scanner secondary scanning direction to scan an orig-inal in the actual ratio.

DescriptionAs the set value is increased, the reproduction ratio in the scanner secondary scanning direction becomes increased. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the reproduction ratio becomes decreased.

* Default: 134* Acceptable values: 76 to 181 (76: Minimum reproduction ratio, 181: Maximum reproduction ratio,

Adjustment amount: 0.0947%/step)

* The shaded area indicates the read area of the original.

Adjustment TimingAfter the following parts are replaced, if there is a problem with a printed image and if the "image dimen-sional adjustment" is required, perform this adjustment:

- CIS unit

Caution• This adjustment requires a scale.• Be sure to follow the defined steps to perform the "image dimensional adjustment", including this

adjustment, as indicated below. Otherwise, the adjustment will not be properly performed.05-448 to 451, 455, 458, 460 to 464, 474 > 05-401 > 05-411 > 05-421 > 05-440 > 05-441 > 05-444 > 05-442 > 05-445 > 05-405 > 05-306 > 05-340 > 05-305 > 05-430 > 05-432 > 05-433 > 05-435 > 05-437 > 05-438 > 05-434* Codes 05-434, 444, 445, 448, 449, 450, 455, 474 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

When the set value is decreased Appropriate reproduction ratio for scanning

Scanner secondary scanning direction

Scanning range

When the set value is increased

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 16

Page 35: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

2

05-350/351

Shading Position Adjustment

PurposeWhen streaky images are output due to scratches or dirt on the shading correction plate, these codes are used to adjust the shading correction position in order to enable shading correction while keeping off the scratches or dirt.

The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:

DescriptionAs the set value is increased, the shading correction position moves to the left of the equipment. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the shading correction position moves to the right of the equipment.

* Default: 128* Acceptable values: 118 to 138 (Adjustment amount: 0.064 mm/step)

In the case of scratches or dirt on a part of the shading correction plate, use these codes to adjust the shading correction position while keeping off the scratches or dirt, and prevent images from being streaky.

Adjustment TimingPerform this adjustment, if images with streaks in the secondary scanning direction are produced.

Caution• If streaky images persist after this adjustment is performed, clean the shading correction plate.• If streaky images still persist, replace the shading correction plate.• If streaky images still persist, check other areas, such as the drum, for flaws or dirt.

Code Applied to05-350 Shading position adjustment when using the original glass05-351 Shading position adjustment when using the ADF/RADF

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 17

Page 36: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

05-354/355

ADF/RADF Paper Aligning Amount Adjustment

* Code 05-355 is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

PurposeA skew of the original is eliminated by making its leading edge contact the aligning roller and slightly slacking it, when the ADF (Automatic Document Feeder) or the RADF (Reversing Automatic Document Feeder) is used to fed. These codes are used to adjust the paper aligning amount for the accurate alignment of the leading edge of paper. Individual codes are available because different rollers are used when scanning simplex and duplex originals.

The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:

DescriptionAs the set value is increased, the paper aligning amount becomes increased. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the paper aligning amount becomes decreased.

* Default: 10* Acceptable values: 0 to 20 (0: Minimum aligning amount, 20: Maximum aligning amount)

Adjustment TimingWhen feeding a simplex (face) original:If an original cannot be fed successfully due to the worn-out ADF/RADF feed roller and if this causes a defective or skewed image, perform this adjustment and increase the paper aligning amount. This is useful as a life-prolong action, until the feed roller is replaced, preventing the image failure.

When feeding a duplex (reverse side) original:If an original cannot be fed successfully due to the worn-out ADF/RADF reverse roller and if this causes a defective or skewed image, perform this adjustment and increase the paper aligning amount. This is useful as a life-prolong action, until the reverse roller is replaced, preventing the image failure.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

Code Applied to05-354 Simplex (face) scanning (ADF/RADF)05-355 Duplex (reverse side) scanning (RADF)

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 18

Page 37: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

2

05-357

Fine Adjustment of ADF/RADF Transport Speed

PurposeThis code is used to adjust the reproduction ratio in the secondary scanning direction. This can be done by changing the ADF/RADF read motor rotating speed because it can change the speed of the original passing the ADF original glass.

DescriptionAs the set value is increased, the reproduction ratio in the scanner secondary scanning direction becomes increased. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the reproduction ratio becomes decreased.

* Default: 50* Acceptable values: 0 to 100 (0: Minimum reproduction ratio, 100: Maximum reproduction ratio)

* To understand corresponding scanning ranges done by the ADF/RADF on the original glass, they are shown in shaded areas.

Adjustment TimingAfter the following part are replaced, if there is a problem with a copied image done by ADF/RADF and if the reproduction ratio of the secondary scanning is required, perform this adjustment.

- Read motor (parts for the ADF/RADF)

Caution• This adjustment requires comparison of a copy image with an original.• The scanning position of the equipment (or the image dimensional adjustment) must be correctly

adjusted prior to this adjustment.If deviated from its correct position, the scanning position when using the ADF/RADF cannot be cor-rectly adjusted.

When the set value is decreased Appropriate reproduction ratio for scanning

Scanner secondary scanning direction

Scanning range

When the set value is increased

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 19

Page 38: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

05-358

ADF/RADF Side Deviation Adjustment

PurposeThis code is used to adjust the scanning position in the scanner primary scanning direction when the ADF/RADF is used, to fit in the proper position of the scanning range in the scanner primary scanning direction.

DescriptionAs the set value is increased, the scanning range is shifted toward the end point of the scanner primary scanning direction. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the scanning range is shifted toward the start point of the scanner primary scanning direction. On a printed sheet of paper, as the set value is increased, the image moves to the rear of paper. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the image moves to the front of paper.

* Default: 128* Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Maximum to the front of paper, 255: Maximum to the rear of paper)

* To understand corresponding scanning ranges done by the ADF/RADF on the original glass, they are shown in shaded areas.

Adjustment TimingIf there is a problem in the printing image of the ADF/RADF and range adjustment of scanner primary scanning direction is required, perform this adjustment.

Caution• This adjustment requires comparison of a copy image with an original.• The scanning position of the equipment (or the image dimensional adjustment) must be correctly

adjusted prior to this adjustment. If the scanning position of the equipment is deviated from the cor-rect position, the scanning position when the ADF/RADF is used cannot be correctly adjusted.

When the set value is decreased Appropriate scanning position

Sca

nner

prim

ary

scan

ning

dire

ctio

n

Scanning range

When the set value is increased

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 20

Page 39: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

2

05-359

CIS Unit Position Adjustment during Scanning from ADF/RADF

PurposeWhen the ADF/RADF is used to scan an original, the amount of light reflected from the exposure light source becomes to the maximum and the CIS unit position is determined where the best image can be obtained.

DescriptionAs the set value is increased, the CIS unit moves to the left of the equipment. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the CIS unit moves to the right of the equipment.

* Default: 128* Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Maximum to the right of the equipment, 255: Maximum to the left of

the equipment)

Adjustment TimingPerform this adjustment, if a scan image when the ADF/RADF is used results in poor quality, compared to a scan image using the original glass.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 21

Page 40: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

05-365/366

Image Location Adjustment of Scanner Primary Scanning Direction (When the ADF/RADF is Used)

PurposeWhen the ADF/RADF is used to scan an original, it is transported to the scanning position on the origi-nal glass and then stopped. These codes are used to adjust the original stop position on the original glass, to fit in the proper position of the scanning range in the scanner secondary scanning direction.

The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:

DescriptionAs the set value is increased, the original is transported to the position closer to the original scale. As a result, the scanning range is shifted toward the end point of the scanner secondary scanning direction. On the other hand, as the set value is decreased, the original is transported to the position far away from the original scale. As a result, the scanning range is shifted toward the start point of the scanner secondary scanning direction.On a printed sheet of paper, as the set value is increased, the image moves to the trailing edge of paper. On the other hand, as the set value is decreased, the image moves to the leading edge of paper.

* Default: 50* Acceptable values: 0 to 100 (0: Maximum to the leading edge of paper, 100: Maximum to the trailing

edge of paper)

* To understand corresponding scanning ranges done by the ADF/RADF on the original glass, they are shown in shaded areas.

Adjustment TimingFor instance, after the ADF/RADF is installed and the test copy is made, if the scan start position is deviated from the appropriate position, perform this adjustment.

CautionThe scanning position of the equipment (or the image dimensional adjustment) must be correctly adjusted prior to this adjustment. If the scanning position of the equipment is deviated from the correct position, scanning position when the ADF/RADF is used cannot be correctly adjusted.

Code Applied to05-365 Simplex (face) scanning (ADF/RADF)05-366 Duplex (reverse side) scanning (RADF)

When the set value is decreased Appropriate scanning position

Scanner secondary scanning direction (when the RADF is used)

Scanning range

When the set value is increased

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 22

Page 41: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

2

05-401/405/1300

Reproduction Ratio Adjustment of Primary Scanning Direction (Fine Adjustment of Polygonal Motor Rotation Speed)

* Code 05-1300 is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* Code 05-1300 is valid only when the FAX Kit is installed.

PurposeThese codes are used to adjust the rotation speed of the polygonal mirror. This changes in pitch of the laser with which the drum is irradiated in the drum primary scanning direction and finally adjusts the reproduction ratio in the primary scanning direction.

The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:

DescriptionAs the set value is increased, the reproduction ratio in the primary scanning direction is increased. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the reproduction ratio is decreased.

* Default: 05-401: 134, 05-405: 131, 05-1300-0/1: 128* Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Minimum reproduction ratio, 255: Maximum reproduction ratio)

[05-401]Key in “1”, press the [INTERRUPT] or [FAX] button, key in “1” and press the [START] button to print a grid pattern with 10 mm square from the A3 or LD drawer. Next, measure the distance between the 1st line and the 21st line from the left edge of the printed grid pattern, and check if the distance is within the specified range, 200 mm ± 0.5 mm.Refer to 3.2.3 [Printer related adjustment (A)] in the Service Handbook.

Code Sub code Applied to05-401 - Primary scanning direction reproduction ratio in the printer operation05-405 - Primary scanning direction reproduction ratio in the copy operation

05-1300 0 Primary scanning direction reproduction ratio in the fax print operation (printing without rotating an image)

1 Primary scanning direction reproduction ratio in the fax print operation (printing with rotating an image)

Paper movement direction

When the set value is decreased Appropriate printing position When the set value is increased

Prim

ary

scan

ning

dire

ctio

n

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 23

Page 42: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

[05-405]

* Shaded areas indicate the image on the paper.

[05-1300]Code 05-401 is used to perform the basic adjustment of the primary scanning direction reproduction ratio. However, if a fax image does not match with the expected primary scanning ratio, code 05-1300 can be used to finely correct the primary scanning ratio. (The adjustment steps are the same as for code 05-401.)

Adjustment TimingAfter the following parts are replaced, if there is a problem with a printed image and if the "image dimen-sional adjustment" is required, perform this adjustment:

- Laser optical unit - SRAM board

Caution• The adjustment for code 05-405 requires a scale.• Be sure to follow the defined steps to perform the "image dimensional adjustment", including this

adjustment, as indicated below. Otherwise, the adjustment will not be properly performed.05-448 to 451, 455, 458, 460 to 464, 474 > 05-401 > 05-411 > 05-421 > 05-440 > 05-441 > 05-444 > 05-442 > 05-445 > 05-405 > 05-306 > 05-340 > 05-305 > 05-430 > 05-432 > 05-433 > 05-435 > 05-437 > 05-438 > 05-434* Codes 05-434, 444, 445, 448, 449, 450, 455 and 474 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/

205.• Code 05-401 is used to perform the basic adjustment of the primary scanning direction reproduction

ratio, therefore, the adjustment using code 05-1300 is unnecessary, unless otherwise required. If the adjustment using code 05-1300 is still necessary, perform the image dimensional adjustment prior to this adjustment.

Paper movement direction

Prim

ary

scan

ning

dire

ctio

n

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 24

Page 43: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

2

05-410/411/498

Adjustment of Primary Scanning Laser Writing Start Position

* Code 05-498 is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

PurposeThese codes are used to adjust the start position of the irradiation with the laser in the primary scanning direction, to fit in the printing range of the image in the printer primary scanning direction.

The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:

DescriptionAs the set value is increased, the printing position of the image is shifted toward the end point (in a direction where the left margin broadens out) of the primary scanning direction. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the printing position is shifted toward the start point (in a direction where the left margin narrows) of the primary scanning direction.

* Default: 05-410/411: 88, 05-498-0/1: 128* Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Minimum left margin, 255: Maximum left margin)

[05-410]The adjustment for code 05-410 is unnecessary because code 05-410 is automatically adjusted when code 05-411 is adjusted.

[05-411]Key in “1”, press the [INTERRUPT] or [FAX] button, key in “1” and press the [START] button to print a grid pattern with 10 mm square from the A3 or LD drawer. Next, measure the distance from the left edge of paper to the 6th line of the printed grid pattern, and check if the distance is within the specified range, 52 mm ± 0.5 mm.Refer to 3.2.3 [Printer related adjustment (B)] in the Service Handbook.

Code Sub code Applied to05-410 - Printing position of primary scanning direction in the copy operation05-411 - Printing position of primary scanning direction in the printer operation05-498 0 Printing position of primary scanning direction of duplex (reverse side) printing,

Long size paper1 Printing position of primary scanning direction of duplex (reverse side) printing,

Short size paper (A4/LT or smaller)

Paper movement direction

When the set value is decreased Appropriate printing position When the set value is increased

Prim

ary

scan

ning

dire

ctio

n

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 25

Page 44: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

[05-498]Key in “3”, press the [INTERRUPT] or [FAX] button, key in “1” and press the [START] button to duplex print a grid pattern with 10 mm square from the A3 or LD drawer. Next, measure the distance from the left edge of paper to the 6th line of the printed grid pattern, and check if the distance is within the speci-fied range, 52 mm ± 0.5 mm.

Adjustment TimingAfter the following parts are replaced, if there is a problem with a printed image and if the "image dimen-sional adjustment" is required, perform this adjustment:

- Laser optical unit - SRAM board

Caution• Be sure to follow the defined steps to perform the "image dimensional adjustment", including this

adjustment, as indicated below. Otherwise, the adjustment will not be properly performed.05-448 to 451, 455, 458, 460 to 464, 474 > 05-401 > 05-411 > 05-421 > 05-440 > 05-441 > 05-444 > 05-442 > 05-445 > 05-405 > 05-306 > 05-340 > 05-305 > 05-430 > 05-432 > 05-433 > 05-435 > 05-437 > 05-438 > 05-434* Codes 05-434, 444, 445, 448, 449, 450, 455 and 474 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/

205.• The adjustment for code 05-410 is unnecessary because code 05-410 is automatically adjusted

when code 05-411 is adjusted.

Paper movement direction

When the set value is decreased Appropriate printing position When the set value is increased

Prim

ary

scan

ning

dire

ctio

n

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 26

Page 45: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

2

05-421/422

Reproduction Ratio Adjustment of Secondary Scanning Direction (Fine Adjustment of Main Motor Rotation Speed)

* Code 05-422 is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* Code 05-422 is valid only when the FAX Kit is installed.

PurposeChanging the rotation speed of the drum changes the pitch of the laser with which the drum is irradiated in the drum secondary scanning direction and adjusts the reproduction ratio of the secondary scanning direction.* By fine adjusting the main motor speed with these codes, rotation speed of transport rollers changes

at the same time and appropriate "secondary scanning reproduction ratio" adjustment is performed.

The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:

DescriptionAs the set value is increased, the reproduction ratio of the secondary scanning direction is increased. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the reproduction ratio is decreased.

* Default: 05-421/422: 128* Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Minimum reproduction ratio, 255: Maximum reproduction ratio)

[05-421]Key in “1”, press the [INTERRUPT] or [FAX] button, key in “1” and press the [START] button to print a grid pattern with 10 mm square from the A3 or LD drawer. Next, measure the distance between the 1st line and the 21st line from the leading edge of the printed grid pattern, and check if the distance is within the specified range, 200 mm ± 0.5 mm.Refer to 3.2.3 [Printer related adjustment (C)] in the Service Handbook.

Code Applied to05-421 Printing reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction in the copy and

printer operations05-422 Image reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction in the fax opera-

tion

Secondary scanning direction

Paper movement direction

When the set value is decreased Appropriate printing position When the set value is increased

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 27

Page 46: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

[05-422]Code 05-421 is used to perform the basic adjustment of the secondary scanning direction reproduction ratio. However, if a fax image does not match with the expected secondary scanning ratio, code 05-422 can be used to finely correct the secondary scanning ratio. (The adjustment steps are the same as for code 05-421.)

Adjustment TimingAfter the following parts are replaced, if there is a problem with a printed image and if the "image dimen-sional adjustment" is required, perform this adjustment:

- Main motor - Drum

CautionCode 05-421 is used to perform the basic adjustment of the secondary scanning direction reproduction ratio, therefore, the adjustment using code 05-422 is unnecessary, unless otherwise required.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 28

Page 47: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

2

05-424/425

Fine Adjustment of Exit Motor Rotation Speed

* These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* The exit motor is installed only when the ADU (Automatic Duplexing Unit) is installed.* Code 05-425 is valid only when the FAX Kit is installed.

PurposeWhen the exit motor rotation speed is too fast, paper sent from the fuser unit is tight. By adjusting the rotation speed of the exit motor, the paper becoming tight can be prevented.

The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:

DescriptionAs the set value is increased, the rotation speed becomes faster. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the rotation speed becomes slower.

* Default: 05-424: 128, 05-425: 128* Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Minimum rotation speed, 255: Maximum rotation speed)

* Code 05-424 is used to perform the basic adjustment of the fine adjustment of the exit motor rotation speed. When code 05-425 is used, the basic adjusted value can be finely adjusted even more. How-ever, basically, the adjustment using code 05-425 is unnecessary.

Adjustment TimingAfter the following parts are replaced, if paper sent from the fuser unit is tight, perform this adjustment:

- Exit roller

Caution• Code 05-424 is used to perform the basic adjustment of the fine adjustment of the exit motor rotation

speed, therefore, the adjustment using code 05-425 is unnecessary, unless otherwise required.• Basically, adjustment is unnecessary because an ideal value is specified for the difference in speed

between the main motor as the driving source of the fuser roller, and the exit motor as the driving source of the exit roller. Use these codes in a particular case, for example, paper transported between the fuser roller and exit roller is tight due to its characteristics.

Code Applied to05-424 Exit motor speed in the copy and printer operations05-425 Exit motor speed in the fax operation

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 29

Page 48: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

05-430 to 438

Margin Adjustment

* Code 05-434 is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

PurposePerform top/left/right/bottom margin in copy and printer modes. Perform bottom margin adjustment at duplex printing.

The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:Code Sub code Applied to Function mode

05-430 - Top margin (blank area at the leading edge of the paper along the paper feeding direction)

Copy

05-431 - Left margin (blank area at the left of the paper along the paper feeding direction)

05-432 - Right margin (blank area at the right of the paper along the paper feeding direction)

05-433 - Bottom margin (blank area at the trailing edge of the paper along the paper feeding direction)

05-434 0 Bottom margin, Duplex (reverse side) printing (blank area at the trailing edge of the paper along the paper feeding direction)

1 Bottom margin, Duplex (reverse side) printing (blank area at the trailing of the paper along the paper feeding direction)

Printer

05-435 - Top margin (blank area at the leading edge of the paper along the paper feeding direction)

05-436 - Left margin (blank area at the left of the paper along the paper feeding direction)

05-437 - Right margin (blank area at the right of the paper along the paper feeding direction)

05-438 - Bottom margin (blank area at the trailing edge of the paper along the paper feeding direction)

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 30

Page 49: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

2

DescriptionBy adjusting the image cutting range, adjustment of an apparent blank area is performed. As the set value is increased, the margin (the area of the image being cut) increases. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the margin becomes decreased.

* Default: 05-430: 9, 05-431: 0, 05-432: 110, 05-433: 153, 05-434: 29, 05-435: 24, 05-436 to 438: 0* Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Minimum margin, 255: Maximum margin)

Adjustment TimingWhen the margin is not in a specified value.

Caution• Open the original cover, ADF or RADF to perform this adjustment.• The left margin adjustment using codes 05-431/436 is unnecessary because the left margin is fixed

when "Adjustment of primary scanning laser writing start position (05-411)" is performed.• Be sure to follow the defined steps to perform the "image dimensional adjustment", including this

adjustment, as indicated below. Otherwise, the adjustment will not be properly performed.05-448 to 451, 455, 458, 460 to 464, 474 > 05-401 > 05-411 > 05-421 > 05-440 > 05-441 > 05-444 > 05-442 > 05-445 > 05-405 > 05-306 > 05-340 > 05-305 > 05-430 > 05-432 > 05-433 > 05-435 > 05-437 > 05-438 > 05-434* Codes 05-434, 444, 445, 448, 449, 450, 455 and 474 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/

205.

Top

Bot

tom

Left

Right

Left margin

Right margin

Bottom marginTop margin

Paper movement direction

Prim

ary

scan

ning

dire

ctio

n

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 31

Page 50: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

05-440 to 445

Adjustment of Secondary Scanning Laser Writing Start Position

* Codes 05-443 to 445 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

PurposeThese codes are used to adjust the paper transport start timing of the laser writing, to fit in the printing range of the image in the printer secondary scanning direction.The benchmark for this adjustment is the secondary scanning printing position when the drawer is used to feed (05-440). When code 05-440 is performed, the adjusted content is applied to the secondary scanning printing position when other units are used to feed. Codes other than code 05-440 are pro-vided in order to finely adjust the secondary scanning printing position when each unit is used to feed. These codes must be performed after the secondary scanning printing position is adjusted when the drawer is used to feed.

The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:

DescriptionAs the set value is increased, the image printing position is shifted toward the end point (trailing edge of paper) of the secondary scanning direction. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the image printing position is shifted toward the start point (leading edge of paper) of the secondary scanning direction.

* Default: 05-440: 14, 05-441: 21* Acceptable values: 0 to 40 (0: Maximum to the leading edge of paper, 40: Maximum to the trailing

edge of paper)

* Default: 05-442 to 445: 8* Acceptable values: 0 to 15 (0: Maximum to the leading edge of paper, 15: Maximum to the trailing

edge of paper)

Code Applied to05-440 Secondary scanning printing position when the drawer is used to feed05-441 Secondary scanning printing position when the PFU (Paper Feed Unit) is

used to feed05-442 Secondary scanning printing position when the bypass tray is used to feed05-443 Reserved05-444 Secondary scanning printing position when the PFP (Paper Feed Pedestal)

is used to feed05-445 Secondary scanning printing position when the ADU (Automatic Duplexing

Unit) is used to feed

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 32

Page 51: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

2

Key in “1” ([05-445] key in “3”), press the [INTERRUPT] or [FAX] button, key in “1” and press the [START] button to print a grid pattern with 10 mm square from each paper source. (A3/LD-sized paper is only for the drawer and ADU. A4/LT-sized paper is for other units.)Next, measure the distance from the leading edge of paper to the 6th line of the printed grid pattern, and check if the distance is within the specified range, 52 mm ± 0.5 mm.Refer to 3.2.3 [Printer related adjustment (D)] in the Service Handbook.

Adjustment TimingAfter the following part is replaced, if there is a problem with a printed image and if the "image dimen-sional adjustment" is required, perform this adjustment.

- Laser optical unit

Caution• First, adjust the secondary scanning printing position when the drawer is used to feed (05-440).

When code 05-440 is performed, this adjusted content is applied to the secondary scanning printing position when other units are used to feed. Then finely adjust the secondary scanning printing posi-tion when other than the drawer is used to feed.

• Be sure to follow the defined steps to perform the "image dimensional adjustment", including this adjustment, as indicated below. Otherwise, the adjustment will not be properly performed.05-448 to 451, 455, 458, 460 to 464, 474 > 05-401 > 05-411 > 05-421 > 05-440 > 05-441 > 05-444 > 05-442 > 05-445 > 05-405 > 05-306 > 05-340 > 05-305 > 05-430 > 05-432 > 05-433 > 05-435 > 05-437 > 05-438 > 05-434* Codes 05-434, 444, 445, 448, 449, 450, 455 and 474 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/

205.

Paper movement direction

When the set value is decreased Appropriate printing position When the set value is increased

Secondary scanning direction

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 33

Page 52: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

05-448 to 451/455/458/460 to 463/474

Aligning Amount Adjustment

* Codes 05-448, 449, 455 and 474 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Purpose"Aligning" refers to a correction of a paper skew by making the paper contact the registration (aligning) roller and slightly slacking the paper. This code is used to change the paper aligning amount.The aligning amount is adjusted on an envelope according to "Aligning amount adjustment (envelope) (05-464)."

The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:

[Aligning Amount Adjustment of PFP (Paper Feed Pedestal) Upper/Lower Drawer]

Note: Note: Only two types of codes are described here. For other codes and default, refer to the next pages. The upcoming explanations for the following parts regarding "Adjustment timing", "Caution" are common; therefore, they are abbreviated.

The paper sizes described here are as follows:

DescriptionAs the set value is increased, the paper aligning amount becomes increased. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the paper aligning amount becomes decreased.

* Default: 14* Acceptable values: 0 to 63 (0: Minimum aligning amount, 63: Maximum aligning amount)

Adjustment Timing• If paper cannot be fed successfully due to the worn-out feed roller and if this causes a defective

image, such as a skew, perform this adjustment and increase the paper aligning amount. This is useful as a life-prolong action, until the feed roller is replaced, preventing the defective print image.

• If there is a problem with a printed image and if the "image dimensional adjustment" is required, per-form this adjustment to adjust the aligning amount prior to individual adjustment.

Code Sub code Applied to05-448 0 PFP upper drawer, when plain paper is fed, long size

1 PFP upper drawer, when plain paper is fed, middle size2 PFP upper drawer, when plain paper is fed, short size

05-449 0 PFP lower drawer, when plain paper is fed, long size1 PFP lower drawer, when plain paper is fed, middle size2 PFP lower drawer, when plain paper is fed, short size

Paper size SizeLong size 330 mm or longerMiddle size 220 mm to 329 mmShort size 219 mm or shorter

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 34

Page 53: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

2

CautionBe sure to follow the defined steps to perform the "image dimensional adjustment", including this adjustment, as indicated below. Otherwise, the adjustment will not be properly performed.05-448 to 451, 455, 458, 460 to 464, 474 > 05-401 > 05-411 > 05-421 > 05-440 > 05-441 > 05-444 > 05-442 > 05-445 > 05-405 > 05-306 > 05-340 > 05-305 > 05-430 > 05-432 > 05-433 > 05-435 > 05-437 > 05-438 > 05-434* Codes 05-434, 444, 445, 448, 449, 450, 455 and 474 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

[Aligning Amount Adjustment of Drawer]

* Default: 22* Acceptable values: 0 to 63 (0: Minimum aligning amount, 63: Maximum aligning amount)

[Aligning Amount Adjustment of PFU (Paper Feed Unit)]

* Default: 14* Acceptable values: 0 to 63 (0: Minimum aligning amount, 63: Maximum aligning amount)

[Aligning Amount Adjustment of ADU (Automatic Duplexing Unit)]

* Default: 05-455-0 to 2: 38, 05-474-0/1: 24, 05-474-2: 33* Acceptable values: 0 to 63 (0: Minimum aligning amount, 63: Maximum aligning amount)

Code Sub code Applied to05-450 0 Drawer, when plain paper is fed, long size

1 Drawer, when plain paper is fed, middle size2 Drawer, when plain paper is fed, short size

Code Sub code Applied to05-451 0 PFU, when plain paper is fed, long size

1 PFU, when plain paper is fed, middle size2 PFU, when plain paper is fed, short size

Code Sub code Applied to05-455 0 ADU, when plain paper is fed, long size

1 ADU, when plain paper is fed, middle size2 ADU, when plain paper is fed, short size

05-474 0 ADU, when thick paper 1 mode is used to feed, long size1 ADU, when thick paper 1 mode is used to feed, middle size2 ADU, when thick paper 1 mode is used to feed, short size

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 35

Page 54: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

[Aligning Amount Adjustment of Bypass Tray]

* Default: 10* Acceptable values: 0 to 63 (0: Minimum aligning amount, 63: Maximum aligning amount)

Code Sub code Applied to05-458 0 Bypass tray, when plain paper is fed, long size

1 Bypass tray, when plain paper is fed, middle size2 Bypass tray, when plain paper is fed, short size

05-460 0 Bypass tray, when thick paper 1 mode is used to feed, long size1 Bypass tray, when thick paper 1 mode is used to feed, middle size2 Bypass tray, when thick paper 1 mode is used to feed, short size

05-461 0 Bypass tray, when thick paper 2 mode is used to feed, long size1 Bypass tray, when thick paper 2 mode is used to feed, middle size2 Bypass tray, when thick paper 2 mode is used to feed, short size

05-462 0 Bypass tray, when thick paper 3 mode is used to feed, long size1 Bypass tray, when thick paper 3 mode is used to feed, middle size2 Bypass tray, when thick paper 3 mode is used to feed, short size3 Bypass tray, when thick paper 3 mode is used to feed, post card

05-463 0 Bypass tray, when transparency film mode is used to feed, long size1 Bypass tray, when transparency film mode is used to feed, middle size2 Bypass tray, when transparency film mode is used to feed, short size

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 36

Page 55: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

2

05-464

Aligning Amount Adjustment (Envelope)

Purpose"Aligning" refers to a correction of skew of an envelope when the envelope is fed from the bypass tray. The envelope is aligned by making its leading edge contact the registration (aligning) roller and slightly slacking it. This code is used to adjust the envelope aligning amount for the accurate alignment.

The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:

* An envelope should be placed lengthwise (R direction).

DescriptionAs the set value is increased, the envelope aligning amount becomes increased. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the envelope aligning amount becomes decreased.

* Default: 10* Acceptable values: 0 to 63 (0: Minimum aligning amount, 63: Maximum aligning amount)

Adjustment Timing• If an envelope cannot be fed successfully due to the worn-out feed roller of the bypass tray and if

this causes a defective or skewed image, perform this adjustment and increase the envelope align-ing amount. This is useful as a life-prolong action, until the feed roller is replaced, preventing the defective print image.

• If there is a problem with a printed image and if the "image dimensional adjustment" is required, per-form this adjustment to adjust the aligning amount prior to individual adjustment.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

Code Sub code Applied to05-464 0 Bypass tray, Envelope, Length: 330 mm or longer

1 Bypass tray, Envelope, Length: 220 mm to 329 mm2 Bypass tray, Envelope, Length: 219 mm or shorter

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 37

Page 56: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

05-466

Adjustment of Pushing Amount from Behind

PurposeWhen paper is fed from the bypass tray, it is transported with the registration (aligning) roller. At the same time, the feed roller is also driven to support the paper transport to the registration (aligning) roller (by pushing the paper from behind). This code is used to adjust the time of pushing the paper from behind, to ensure that paper is securely fed.

The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:

DescriptionAs the set value is increased, the driving time of the feed roller becomes longer and the amount of pushing the paper from behind becomes increased. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the driving time of the feed roller becomes shorter and the amount of pushing the paper from behind becomes decreased.

* Default: 0* Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0 to 128: No pushing, 255: Maximum amount of pushing)

Adjustment TimingParticularly when thick paper is fed from the bypass tray, if it is not fully pulled to the registration roller and the following error occurs, perform this adjustment to further push the paper from behind.Error code: E010 (Leading edge of paper stops at the registration roller)

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

Code Sub code Applied to05-466 0 Bypass tray, when plain paper mode is used to feed

1 Bypass tray, when post card mode is used to feed2 Reserved3 Bypass tray, when envelope mode is used to feed4 Bypass tray, when thick paper 1 mode is used to feed5 Bypass tray, when thick paper 2 mode is used to feed6 Bypass tray, when thick paper 3 mode is used to feed7 Bypass tray, when transparency film mode is used to feed

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 38

Page 57: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

2

05-497

Adjustment of Drawer Sideways Deviation

PurposeThis code is used to adjust the start position of the irradiation with the laser in the primary scanning direction, to fit the side deviation in the printing range of the image in the printer primary scanning direc-tion.

The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:

* Sub codes 2 and 3 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

DescriptionAs the set value is increased, the printing position is shifted toward the end point (the left margin broad-ens out) of the primary scanning direction. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the scanning range is shifted toward the start point (the left margin narrows) of the primary scanning direction.

* Default: 128* Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Minimum left margin, 255: Maximum left margin)

Key in “1”, press the [INTERRUPT] or [FAX] button, key in “1” and press the [START] button to print a grid pattern with 10 mm square from the A3 or LD drawer. Next, measure the distance from the left edge of paper to the 6th line of the printed grid pattern, and check if the distance is within the specified range, 52 mm ± 0.5 mm.Refer to 3.2.3 [Printer related adjustment (B)] in the Service Handbook.

Adjustment TimingAfter the following parts are replaced and when an adjustment is necessary because there is a side deviation.

- Drawer - PFU drawer - PFP upper drawer - PFP lower drawer - Bypass tray

Code Sub code Applied to05-497 0 Drawer side deviation

1 PFU drawer side deviation2 PFP upper drawer side deviation3 PFP lower drawer side deviation5 Bypass tray side deviation

Paper movement direction

When the set value is decreased Appropriate printing position When the set value is increased

Prim

ary

scan

ning

dire

ctio

n

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 39

Page 58: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

Caution• Basically, do not perform deviation adjustments for the drawer (05-497-0) and PFU drawer (05-497-

1). When adjustments of the drawer and PFU drawer are necessary, perform the adjustments using "Adjustment of primary scanning laser writing start position (05-411)."

• Perform the "Adjustment of primary scanning laser writing start position (05-411)" prior to this adjust-ment.The primary scanning laser writing start position adjusted in "Adjustment of primary scanning laser writing start position (05-411)" is the benchmark and the drawer side deviation (05-497) is the adjustment used to correct this benchmark.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 40

Page 59: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

2

05-501/503/504/700/710/714/845 to 847

Density Adjustment "Manual Density" Fine Adjustment (Center Setting) (Copy/FAX/Scanner Function)

* Codes 05-700, 710 and 714 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* Codes 05-700, 710 and 714 are valid only when the FAX Kit is installed.

PurposeThese codes are used to adjust the image density to the desired level when the manual density mode is used.• Perform this adjustment in each function mode with each original mode selected.

The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:

DescriptionAs the set value is increased, the image density becomes higher, with the density level set to the center in manual density mode. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the image density becomes lower.However, in Text mode with Fax Function (05-700), as the set value is increased, the image density becomes lower, with the density level set to the center in manual density mode. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the image density becomes higher.

* Default: 05-501/503/504: 128, 05-700: 120, 05-710/714/845 to 847: 128* Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Lightest, 255: Darkest)

Adjustment TimingAt the request of a user, use these codes to reset the center density set value in manual density mode during the copy/fax transmission/scan operation when necessary.

CautionIf the set value is larger, the life of supplies may become shorter.

Code Applied to Function mode05-501 Photo mode Copy05-503 Text/photo mode05-504 Text mode05-700 Text mode

(As the grayscale is binary (black/white), this will be simple binary threshold adjustment.)

Fax

05-710 Text/photo mode05-714 Photo mode05-845 Text/photo mode Scanner05-846 Text mode05-847 Photo mode

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 41

Page 60: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

05-505 to 507/701/715/719/850 to 852

Density Adjustment "Manual Density" Fine Adjustment (Lighter Setting) (Copy/FAX/Scanner Function)

* Codes 05-701, 715 and 719 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* Codes 05-701, 715 and 719 are valid only when the FAX Kit is installed.

PurposeThese codes are used to adjust the amount of change in the output image density per step, if the den-sity slider is set to the "lighter" side, when the manual density mode is used. This adjustment is intended to obtain a desired image density for the density setting.• Perform this adjustment in each function mode with each original mode selected.

The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:

DescriptionAs the set value is increased, the decreasing tendency of the density becomes stronger (much lighter) when the density level is set to "lighter" side. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the decreasing ten-dency of the density becomes weaker (less lighter) when the density level is set to "lighter" side.

* Default: 33* Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Darkest, 255: Lightest)

Adjustment TimingAt the request of a user, use these codes to reset the density per step when the density level is set to "lighter" side, during the copy/ fax transmission/scan operation when necessary.

Caution• If the set value is too large, the adjustment for -1 or more may not be performed when the manual

density level is set to "lighter" side.• If "0" is set, the density may not change when the density level is set on the control panel.

Code Applied to Function mode05-505 Text/Photo mode Copy05-506 Photo mode05-507 Text mode05-701 Text mode

(As the grayscale is binary (black/white), this will be simple binary threshold adjustment.)

Fax

05-715 Photo mode05-719 Text/photo mode05-850 Text/photo mode Scanner05-851 Text mode05-852 Photo mode

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 42

Page 61: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

2

05-508 to 510/702/720/724/855 to 857

Density Adjustment "Manual Density" Fine Adjustment (Darker Setting) (Copy/FAX/Scanner Function)

* Codes 05-702, 720 and 724 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* Codes 05-702, 720 and 724 are valid only when the FAX Kit is installed.

PurposeThese codes are used to adjust the amount of change in the output image density per step, if the den-sity slider is set to the "darker" side, when the manual density mode is used. This adjustment is intended to obtain a desired image density for the density setting.• Perform this adjustment in each function mode with each original mode selected.

The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:

DescriptionAs the set value is increased, the image density becomes higher, with the density level set to "darker" side in manual density mode. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the image density becomes lower.

* Default: 33* Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Lightest, 255: Darkest)

Adjustment TimingAt the request of a user, use these codes to reset the density per step when the density level is set to "darker" side, during the copy/fax transmission/scan operation when necessary.

Caution• If the set value is too large, the adjustment for +1 or more may not be performed when the manual

density level is set to "darker" side.• If "0" is set, the density may not change when the density level is set on the control panel.

Code Applied to Function mode05-508 Text/Photo mode Copy05-509 Photo mode05-510 Text mode05-702 Text mode

(As the grayscale is binary (black/white), this will be sim-ple binary threshold adjustment.)

Fax

05-720 Photo mode05-724 Text/photo mode05-855 Text/photo mode Scanner05-856 Text mode05-857 Photo mode

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 43

Page 62: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

05-512/514/515/725/729/860 to 862

Density Adjustment "Automatic Density" Fine Adjustment (Copy/FAX/Scanner Function)

* Codes 05-725 and 729 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

PurposeThese codes are used to adjust the image density to the desired level when the automatic density mode is used.• Perform this adjustment in each function mode with each original mode selected.

The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:

DescriptionAs the set value is increased, the image density becomes higher in automatic density mode. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the image density becomes lower.

* Default: 128* Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Lightest, 255: Darkest)

Adjustment TimingAt the request of a user, use these codes to reset the image density in automatic density mode during the copy/fax transmission/scan operation when necessary.

CautionIf the set value is larger, the life of supplies may become shorter.

Code Applied to Function mode05-512 Photo mode Copy05-514 Text/Photo mode05-515 Text mode05-725 Photo mode Fax05-729 Text/photo mode05-860 Text/photo mode Scanner05-861 Text mode05-862 Photo mode

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 44

Page 63: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

2

05-532 to 534/835 to 837

Range Correction Background Peak Adjustment (Copy/Scanner Function)

PurposeThese codes are used to adjust the background peak of the range correction during the copy/scan operation. By adjusting the background peak, an image becomes much whiter because pixels judged as "white" are increased.• Perform this adjustment in each function mode with each original mode selected.

The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:

DescriptionAs the set value is increased, the image background is not printed out. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the image background is not deleted but remains.

* Default: 05-532: 32, 05-533: 22, 05-534: 46, 05-835: 32, 05-836: 46, 05-837: 16* Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Blacker than the image, 255: Whiter than the image)

Adjustment TimingAt the request of a user, use these codes to make the image white during the copy/scan operation when necessary.

Caution• Text handwritten with a pencil, light text, or thin lines may not be printed clearly, depending on the

adjustment. Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while checking the copy/scanned-in image.• The adjustment value for copying becomes valid when "fixed background peak" is selected in

"Range correction (05-570 to 572/693 to 695)."• The adjustment value for scanning becomes valid when "fixed background peak" is selected in

"Range correction (05-825 to 827/830 to 832)."

Code Applied to Function mode05-532 Text/Photo mode Copy[05-533 Photo mode05-534 Text mode05-835 Text/photo mode Scanner05-836 Text mode05-837 Photo mode

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 45

Page 64: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

05-535 to 537/820 to 822

Range Correction Text Peak Adjustment (Copy/Scanner Function)

PurposeThese codes are used to adjust the text peak of the range correction during the copy/scan operation. By adjusting the text peak, an image becomes much blacker because pixels judged as "black" are increased.• Perform this adjustment in each function mode with each original mode selected.

The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:

DescriptionAs the set value is increased, the entire image becomes white. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the entire image becomes black.

* Default: 05-535: 246, 05-536: 254, 05-537: 236, 05-820: 246, 05-821: 236, 05-822: 254* Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Blacker than the image, 255: Whiter than the image)

Adjustment TimingAt the request of a user, use these codes to make the image black during the copy/scan operation when necessary.

Caution• Text handwritten with a pencil, light text, or thin lines may not be printed clearly, and a dark area may

be blurred, depending on the adjustment. Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while check-ing the copy/scanned-in image.

• The adjustment value for copying becomes valid when "fixed text peak" is selected in "Range cor-rection (05-570 to 572/693 to 695)."

• The adjustment value for scanning becomes valid when "fixed text peak" is selected in "Range cor-rection (05-825 to 827/830 to 832)."

Code Applied to Function mode05-535 Text/Photo mode Copy05-536 Photo mode05-537 Text mode05-820 Text/photo mode Scanner05-821 Text mode05-822 Photo mode

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 46

Page 65: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

2

05-570 to 572/693 to 695/825 to 827/830 to 832

Range Correction (Copy/Scan Function)

PurposeThese codes are used to switch the background peak and text peak to fixed/varied, by specifying the range correction method during the copy/scan operation. Once “fixed peak” is selected, the range cor-rection is performed with the fixed values. The value of the background peak affects the reproducibility of the image background density. On the other hand, the value of the text peak affects the reproducibil-ity of the text density.• Perform this adjustment under the use conditions of the original glass, ADF and RADF in each func-

tion mode with each original mode selected.

The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:

DescriptionWhen these codes are used, the range correction method is specified by the one's and ten's place. Allocated in the one's place is for the automatic density mode, and the ten's place for manual density mode.Setting range for each digit is as shown below:

Background peak Text peak1: fixed fixed2: varied fixed3: fixed varied4: varied variede.g. When the set value is "22," "the background peak is varied and the text peak is fixed" in both automatic density mode and manual density mode.

* Default: 05-570: EUR/UC: 12, JPN: 22, 05-571: 12, 05-572: 22, 05-693: EUR/UC: 12, JPN: 22, 05-694: 12, 05-695: 22, 05-825 to 827, 830 to 832: 12

* Acceptable values: 11 to 14, 21 to 24, 31 to 34, 41 to 44

Adjustment TimingPerform this adjustment to adjust the reproducibility of the image background density and the text den-sity.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

Code Applied to Function mode05-570 The original glass is used, text/photo mode Copy[05-571 The original glass is used, photo mode05-572 The original glass is used, text mode05-693 The ADF/RADF is used, text/photo mode05-694 The ADF/RADF is used, photo mode05-695 The ADF/RADF is used, text mode05-825 The original glass is used, text/photo mode Scanner05-826 The original glass is used, text mode05-827 The original glass is used, photo mode05-830 The ADF/RADF is used, text/photo mode05-831 The ADF/RADF is used, text mode05-832 The ADF/RADF is used, photo mode

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 47

Page 66: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

05-593 to 595

Gamma Data Slope Correction (Copy Function)

PurposeThese codes are used to adjust image contrast by correcting the gamma data slope during the copy operation.

The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:

DescriptionAs the set value is increased, the image contrast becomes higher. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the image contrast becomes lower.

* Default: 5* Acceptable values: 1 to 9 (0: Lowest contrast, 9: Highest contrast)

Adjustment TimingUse these codes to adjust the image contrast during the copy operation.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

Code Applied to05-593 Copy function, text/photo mode05-594 Copy function, photo mode05-595 Copy function, text mode

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 48

Page 67: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

2

05-596 to 599

Gamma Balance Adjustment (Printer Function)

* These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

PurposeThese codes are used to adjust the gamma balance of the image density in three areas, low, medium, and high density areas, when the network printer function is used.• Perform this adjustment in each halftone mode for each emulation by density area.

The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:

DescriptionAs the set value is increased, the image density in the intended adjustment density area becomes higher. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the image density becomes lower.• Turn the main switch OFF and ON. Then perform the printer operation to check the image quality.

* Default: 128* Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Lightest, 255: Darkest)

Adjustment TimingUse these codes to check the image when the network printer function is used, and perform this adjust-ment.

CautionThe density of light text or a graphic image varies, if the medium or high density area is mainly adjusted. It is not affected, if the low density area is adjusted.

Code Sub code Applied to Emulation05-596 0 Smooth mode, low density area PS

1 Smooth mode, medium density area2 Smooth mode, high density area

05-597 0 Detail mode, low density area1 Detail mode, medium density area2 Detail mode, high density area

05-598 0 Smooth mode, low density area PCL1 Smooth mode, medium density area2 Smooth mode, high density area

05-599 0 Detail mode, low density area1 Detail mode, medium density area2 Detail mode, high density area

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 49

Page 68: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

05-600 to 602/869 to 871

Background Adjustment (Copy/Scanner Function)

PurposeThese codes are used to switch the background adjustment data and adjust the background density during the copy/scan operation.• Perform this adjustment in each original mode.

The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:

DescriptionAs the set value is increased, the background becomes lighter. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the background becomes darker.

* Default: 05-600 to 602: 3, 05-869: 4, 05-870: 6, 05-871: 4 * Acceptable values: 1 to 9 (1: Darker background (reproduced), 9: Lighter background (eliminated))

Adjustment TimingAt the request of a user, use these codes to adjust the reproducibility of the image background density.

Caution• If the adjustment is performed to make the background lighter, a light area becomes lighter or elimi-

nated. Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while checking the copy/scanned-in image.• The background density for the copy function may not vary so much, depending on "Range correc-

tion background peak adjustment (05-532 to 534)" and "Range correction (05-570 to 572/693 to 695)".

Code Applied to Function mode05-600 Text/photo mode Copy05-601 Text mode05-602 Photo mode05-869 Text/photo mode Scanner05-870 Text mode05-871 Photo mode

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 50

Page 69: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

2

05-609

Switching of Gamma Correction Table (Copy/FAX/Scanner Function)

PurposeThis code is used to switch the gamma table when paper is scanned from the ADF/RADF during the copy/fax transmission/scan operation. This code is used to adjust the image quality when an original is scanned from the ADF/RADF, to the one when the original is scanned from the original glass.

DescriptionAs the set value is increased within the range between 1 and 4 except the default (0), the image becomes lighter. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the image becomes darker.

* Default: 0 (Equivalent to the medium density between when the set value is 3 and when it is 4)* Acceptable values: 0 to 4 (1: Darkest, 4: Lightest)

Adjustment TimingUse this code to adjust the image quality when necessary, if there is a visible difference in density when the image is scanned from the original glass and when it is scanned from the ADF/RADF.

CautionThe original seen through the back of the page may be printed, and text handwritten with a pencil, light text, or thin lines may not be printed clearly, when the ADF/RADF is used. Therefore, carefully perform the adjustment, while checking the copy/scanned-in image.

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 51

Page 70: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

05-620 to 623/865 to 867

Sharpness Adjustment (Copy/Scanner Function)

PurposeTheses codes are used to reset the filtering processing (a process performed to enhance edge of image data) intensity during the copy/scan operation, to make the image sharper or softer.• Perform this adjustment in each function mode with each original mode selected.

The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:

DescriptionWhen these codes are used, the filtering intensity is specified by the one's and the ten's place. The one's place is fixed in each original mode. As the ten's place is increased, a sharper image is printed. As it is decreased, a softer image is printed. Also, as it is decreased, moiré is less likely to occur.

One's place (filter shape):Fixed value (Filter for each original mode selected)

Ten's place (sharpness intensity):0 (sharpness at default)1 to 9 (1: Softest, 9: Sharpest)

* Default: 05-620: EUR/UC: 1, JPN: 0, 05-621/623: 0, 05-865 to 867: 0* Acceptable values (ten's place): 0 to 9

Adjustment Timing• At the request of a user, perform this adjustment to make the image sharper or softer during the

copy operation when necessary.• Perform this adjustment if insufficient sharpness adjustment causes degradation in the image quality

(moiré, insufficient sharpness).

CautionIf the set value in the ten's place is too large, moiré is more likely to occur on the printout. On the other hand, if it is too small, the image may be blurred (insufficient sharpness). Therefore, perform this adjust-ment to acquire the optimum image quality, while checking the printout.

Code Sub code Applied to Function mode05-620 - Text/photo mode Copy05-621 - Photo mode, error diffusion05-622 - Text mode05-623 - Photo mode, dither05-865 0 Text/photo mode, reproduction ratio: 25 to

40%Scanner

1 Text/photo mode, reproduction ratio: 41 to 80%

2 Text/photo mode, reproduction ratio: 81 to 100%

05-866 0 Text mode, reproduction ratio: 25 to 40%1 Text mode, reproduction ratio: 41 to 80%2 Text mode, reproduction ratio: 81 to 100%

05-867 0 Photo mode, reproduction ratio: 25 to 40%1 Photo mode, reproduction ratio: 41 to 80%2 Photo mode, reproduction ratio: 81 to 100%

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 52

Page 71: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

2

05-648/654/655

Adjustment of Smudged/Faint Text (Copy/Printer Function)

* Codes 05-645/655 are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

PurposeThese codes are used to prevent smudged/faint text when the copy/network printer function is used to print.• Perform this adjustment in each function mode regarding the following items:

The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:

DescriptionAs the set value is increased, the faint text is suppressed. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the smudged text is suppressed.• When performing this adjustment for the printer function, turn the main switch OFF and ON. Then

perform the printer operation to check the printout.

* Default (copy function): 05-648: 3* Acceptable values: 0 to 4 (0: Maximum smudged text suppression, 4: Maximum faint text suppres-

sion)

* Default (printer function): 05-654/655: 5* Acceptable values: 0 to 9 (0: Maximum faint text suppression, 9: Maximum smudged text suppres-

sion)

Adjustment TimingAt the request of a user, use these codes to suppress the smudged/faint text and thin lines, when the copy/network printer function is used to print.

CautionNote that the image quality and life of replacement parts may not meet the specifications when a value other than the default is set.

Code Applied to Function mode05-648 Text/photo mode Copy[05-654 PS printing Printer^ 05-655 PCL printing¸

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 53

Page 72: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

05-664/665

Upper Limit in Toner Saving Mode (Printer Function)

* These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

PurposeThese codes are used to adjust the upper limit of the printing density when the network printer function is used to print in toner save mode. By making the printing density lower, toner can be saved.• Perform this adjustment in printer mode regarding the following items:

The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:

DescriptionAs the set value is increased, the printing density becomes higher in toner save mode. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the printing density becomes lower.

* Default: 136* Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: Lightest, 255: Darkest)

Adjustment TimingAt the request of a user, use these codes to reset the density during the print operation in toner save mode.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

Code Applied to05-664 PS printing05-665 PCL printing

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 54

Page 73: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

2

05-667/672/676/678

Adjustment of Image Density (Copy/Printer/FAX Function)

* Code 05-676 is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* Code 05-676 is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.* Code 05-678 is valid only when the FAX Kit is installed.

PurposeThese codes are used to adjust the dot size by specifying the width of laser pulse, which is assigned to the beam levels. This is used for 4 divided smoothing (a process to reproduce smooth text and thin lines) when the copy/printer/fax reception function is used to print. The primary scanning direction is divided into four and the dot width is set at five levels including level "0."• Perform this adjustment in function mode regarding the following items:

The table below shows the adjustment codes and their applications:

DescriptionAs the set value is decreased, the beam width in the primary scanning direction becomes smaller and dots are reproduced in smaller size.

* Default:05-667-0: 0, 05-667-1: 19, 05-667-2: 25, 05-667-3: 31, 05-667-4: 4405-672-0: 0, 05-672-1: 19, 05-672-2: 25, 05-672-3: 31, 05-672-4: 5605-676-0: 0, 05-676-1: 19, 05-676-2: 25, 05-676-3: 31, 05-676-4: 4405-678-0: 0, 05-678-1: 19, 05-678-2: 25, 05-678-3: 31, 05-678-4: 44

* Acceptable values: 0 to 63 (0: Smallest dots, 255: Largest dots)

Adjustment TimingAt the request of a user, use these codes to make the dot size in the primary scanning direction smaller, when copy/printer or fax function is used.

Code Sub code Applied to Function mode

05-667 0 Beam level 0/4 Copy1 Beam level 1/42 Beam level 2/43 Beam level 3/44 Beam level 4/4

05-672 0 GDI printing, beam level 0/4 Printer1 GDI printing, beam level 1/42 GDI printing, beam level 2/43 GDI printing, beam level 3/44 GDI printing, beam level 4/4

05-676 0 PS/PCL printing, beam level 0/41 PS/PCL printing, beam level 1/42 PS/PCL printing, beam level 2/43 PS/PCL printing, beam level 3/44 PS/PCL printing, beam level 4/4

05-678 0 Beam level 0/4 Fax1 Beam level 1/42 Beam level 2/43 Beam level 3/44 Beam level 4/4

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05

2 - 55

Page 74: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

Caution• Set the values to match the order of beam levels to the large and small set values. (Set the maxi-

mum value for beam level 4/4 and the minimum value for beam level 0/4.)• The adjustment of beam level 4 affects the dot size the most.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Adjustment Mode 05 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

2 - 56

Page 75: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

3. Code in Setting Mode 08

List of 08 Setting Code

Code Content Page08-202 Externally Installed Copy Counter / Controller

Device3-6

08-203 Equipment Adjustment Mode Display 3-708-204 Auto-Clear Timer Setting 3-808-205 Auto Power Save Mode Timer Setting 3-908-206 Auto Shutoff Mode Timer Setting (Sleep Mode) 3-1008-209 Default Setting of Filing Format when E-mailing 3-1108-219 Default Setting of Filing Format when Storing Files

(Scanner Function)3-12

08-224 to 228 Paper Size 3-1308-229 to 242/244/245/337 to 341/471 Paper Size (Feeding/Widthwise Direction) 3-1408-246 Clearing Copy Jobs at Auto Clear 3-1508-250 Service Technician Telephone Number 3-1608-251 Setting Value of PM Counter 3-1708-252 Current Value of PM Counter Display / 0 Clearing 3-1808-253 Error History Display 3-1908-254 LT<->A4/LD<->A3 3-2108-255 PFP Installation 3-2208-258 FSMS Acceptance 3-2308-260 Web Data Retention Period 3-2408-261 Fixes the Paper Size Setting for the Bypass Tray 3-2508-263 Administrator's Password 3-2608-265 Maximum Data Capacity at E-mailing 3-2708-266 Maximum Data Capacity at Internet FAX 3-2808-273 Default Setting of Partial Size when Transmitting

E-mail3-29

08-274 Default Setting of Partial Size when Transmitting Internet FAX

3-30

08-276 Default Setting of Density Adjustment (Scanner Function)

3-31

08-281 Default Setting of Resolution (Scanner Function) 3-3208-283 Default Setting of Original Mode (Scanner Func-

tion)3-33

08-284 Default Setting of Duplexing Mode (Scanner Function)

3-34

08-285 Default Setting of Image Rotation Mode (Scanner Function)

3-35

08-286 Default Setting of Original Size (Scanner Func-tion)

3-36

08-290 to 293/296 to 299/978/979 Raw Print Job 3-3708-300 Maximum Copy Count (Copy Function) 3-4008-305 to 308 Print Counter Display (by Paper Size) 3-4108-312 to 314 Scan Counter Display (by Paper Size) 3-4308-315/316 Number of Transmitted/Received Pages in FAX

Function3-45

08-320 to 323 Print Counter Display (By Large/Small Size) 3-4608-327 to 329 Scan Counter Display 3-4708-330/332 Display of Number of Transmitted/Received

Pages in FAX Function3-48

08-335 Display of Total Number of Pages 3-49

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 1

Page 76: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-345 Count Setting of Envelope (PM) 3-5008-346 Count Setting of Large Size Paper (PM) 3-5108-347/353 Definition Setting of Large Size Paper (PM / Fee

Charging System Counter)3-52

08-348/349 Definition Setting of Thick Paper / Transparency Film (PM)

3-53

08-352 Count Setting of Large Size Paper (Fee Charging System Counter)

3-54

08-356 to 358/360/370/372/374/1411 Drawer Counter Display 3-5508-361/1150/1158/1172/1174/1182/1198/1200/1214/1224/1246/1250/1268/1298/1300/1312/1314/1316/1320/1322/1328/1330/1332/1336

PM Management Setting 3-56

08-381 External Counter Function 3-5908-388/389 Copying Total Counter 3-6008-400 Fuser Unit Error Status Counter 3-6108-404/405 Temperature Drop Setting in Ready State 3-6208-407/411 Fuser Roller Temperature in Ready State 3-6308-409/448 Fuser Roller Temperature in Energy Saver Mode 3-6408-410/413/437/438/450 to 453/520/521 Fuser Roller Temperature during Printing (by

Paper Type)3-65

08-414 Toner Density Correction Switching 3-6608-424/425 Temperature Drop Switching Time Setting in

Ready State3-67

08-433/800/801/802/804/896 Temperature Control Lower Limit 3-6808-439 to 441/523/526 Pre-Running Time for First Printing (by Paper

Type)3-69

08-455 Toner Supply Amount Correction 3-7008-462 Setting for Switchback Operation to Copy Mixed-

Sized Original on RADF (A/B Format)3-71

08-463 Light Control Status 3-7308-476/536/537/539 Temperature Drop Setting during Printing 3-7408-480 Default Setting of Paper Source 3-7608-481 Automatic Paper Source Selection 3-7708-482 Feeding Retry 3-7808-483 Pre-Running Rotation of Polygonal Motor 3-7908-486 Timing of Auto-Clearing of Polygonal Motor Pre-

Running Rotation3-80

08-502 Error Diffusion and Dither Setting at Photo Mode 3-8108-510 Automatic FAX Transmission 3-8208-515/516 Temperature Setting during Warming-up 3-8308-525/527/540/541 Temperature Drop Switching Time Setting during

Printing3-84

08-535 Temperature Drop Control Setting during Printing (Temperature/Time)

3-86

08-538 Default Setting in Density Adjustment Mode (Copy Function)

3-87

08-550 Default Setting of Original Mode (Copy Function) 3-8808-603 Setting for Automatic Duplexing Mode (Copy

Function)3-89

08-604 APS/AMS Default Setting (Copy Function) 3-9008-611 Book Type Original Priority (Copy Function) 3-9108-615 Size Information of Main Memory and Page Mem-

ory3-92

08-617 Print Setting without Department Code (Printer Function)

3-93

08-618 Default Setting of RADF Original Size (Copy Function)

3-94

Code Content Page

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 2

Page 77: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-631 Custom Mode Setting 3-9508-638 Time Differences 3-9608-641 Automatic Sorting Mode Setting (When Using

ADF/RADF) (Copy Function)3-97

08-642 Default Setting of Sorter Mode (Copy Function) 3-9808-649 Magazine Sort Setting (Copy Function) 3-9908-650 2-in-1/4-in-1 Page Allocating Order Setting (Copy

Function)3-101

08-655 Reset 05/08 Codes 3-10208-660/661 Auto-Forwarding Setting of Received FAX/E-mail 3-10308-666 BOX Partition Clearing 3-10408-669 System All Clearing 3-10508-672 Initialization of Department Management Informa-

tion3-106

08-684/686 Rebuilding Databases 3-10708-685 Duplex Printing by Alternate Circulation 3-10808-690 CF Formatting 3-10908-691 Template Function Setting 3-11008-693 Initialization of NIC Information 3-11108-695 Toner Remaining Check Function (Supports

Embedded IC chip)3-112

08-698 Limit Function for the Number of Paper Exit 3-11308-699 Limit Number Setting for Paper Exit 3-11408-702/703/707/710/711/715 to 721/723/726 to 730/772/773/780 to 790/796

TOSHIBA Remote Device Management System (RDMS) Related Setting

3-115

08-712/713/714 250 sheets limitation for output pages 3-11808-767 to 771/775 to 778 Service Notification Function Setting 3-11908-805 to 809/814/818/819/826/864 to 867 Main Charger Grid Bias Correction (Copy/Printer/

Fax Function)3-120

08-830/868/869 Transfer DC Correction 3-12208-831/870/871 Separation DC Output Correction 3-12308-833 to 837/840/857 to 863 Developer Bias Correction (Copy/Printer/Fax

Function)3-124

08-838 Recycled Toner Saving Control Switching 3-12608-839 Correction by Temperature/Humidity 3-12708-872/873/875 to 877/883/884 Laser Power Correction (Copy/Printer/Fax Func-

tion)3-128

08-886 Temperature Drop Control Setting in Ready State (Temperature/Time)

3-129

08-900/906 ROM Version Display 3-13008-905 Process for Last Page (one-sided original) at

Duplex Copying3-131

08-921/1951 FROM Internal Program/ FROM Basic Section Software Version Display

3-132

08-922/923 Function Table Data Version / Language Data Ver-sion Display

3-133

08-945 Port 9100 Bi-directional Communication ON/OFF 3-13408-947 Initialization when Software is Upgraded 3-13508-949 Drum Reverse Rotation Specification Page Set-

ting3-136

08-970 Sound Setting When Switching to Energy Saver Mode

3-137

08-971 Toner Near Empty Threshold Value 3-13808-973 PCL Line Feed Code Setting 3-13908-995 Equipment Number (Serial Number) Display 3-14008-1002 Selection of NIC Board Status Information 3-141

Code Content Page

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 3

Page 78: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-1003 Ethernet Speed / Communication Speed Setting 3-14208-1006 to 1010/1112 TCP/IP 3-14308-1011/1012 IPX/SPX 3-14408-1013 Availability of NCP Burst 3-14508-1014/1015/1103 to 1105 AppleTalk 3-14608-1017 to 1019 DNS 3-14708-1020 DDNS Desired Level 3-14808-1024/1025 Name of WINS Server 3-14908-1026 to 1029 NetWare 3-15008-1030 to 1032 HTTP 3-15108-1037 to 1045/1100 to 1102/1111 SMTP 3-15208-1046 to 1052/1097/1098 POP3 3-15408-1055 FTP 3-15508-1063/1065/1066/1069/1070/1099 SNMP 3-15608-1073/1074 Raw TCP Print 3-15808-1075 to 1077 LPD Print 3-15908-1078 to 1088 IPP Print 3-16008-1093 to 1096 NetWare Print 3-16208-1114 Text Transmission of Internet FAX 3-16308-1123 NT Domain ON/OFF Setting 3-16408-1124 Workgroup Name 3-16508-1141 Display of MAC Address 3-16608-1144 Processing in the event of Memory Full Error 3-16708-1149 Enhanced Bold for PCL6 3-16808-1372 Heater and Energizing Time Accumulating

Counter Display / 0 Cleaning3-169

08-1378 Fuser Roller Ready Temperature Time Accumulat-ing Counter / 0 Cleaning

3-170

08-1380 Fuser Roller Printing Temperature Time Accumu-lating Counter / 0 Cleaning

3-171

08-1382 Fuser Roller Energy Saving Temperature Time Accumulating Counter Display / 0 Clearing

3-172

08-1385/1386/1388 Fuser Roller Paper Type Output Page Number Counter / 0 Cleaning

3-173

08-1410 Toner Cartridge Driving Time Counter 3-17408-1428 Forcible SRAM Backup Data All Clearing 3-17508-1440 IP Conflict Detect 3-17608-1447 IPP admin Name 3-17708-1448 IPP admin Password 3-17808-1449 IPP authentication method 3-17908-1450 User name for IPP authentication 3-18008-1451 Password for IPP authentication 3-18108-1628 Drum Life Correction Switching of the Drum

Reverse/Forward Rotation Amount3-182

08-1882 Initialization of the Scan Memory Area 3-18308-1913 Function Clear LED Flashing 3-18408-1952 to 1955 Controller ROM / Scanner ROM Program Version

Display3-185

08-1960 to 1979 IP Address Range for IP Filter 3-18608-1989 Enabling Server's IP Address acquired by DHCP

The Domain Name Server Option (6)3-187

08-1990 Enabling Server's IP Address acquired by DHCP The NetBIOS over TCP/IP Name Server Option (44) = Primary and Secondary WINS Name

3-188

08-1991 Enable Serverfs IP Address acquired by DHCP The Host Name Vender Extension Option (12)

3-189

Code Content Page

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 4

Page 79: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-1993 Enable Server’s IP Address acquired by DHCP The Simple Main Server Option (69) Simple Mail Server Address

3-190

08-1994 Enable Server’s IP Address acquired by DHCP The POP3 Server Option (70) Post Office Server Address

3-191

08-1996 Enable Server’s IP Address acquired by DHCP The SNTP Server Option (42) SNTP Server Address

3-192

Code Content Page

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 5

Page 80: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-202

Externally Installed Copy Counter / Controller Device

PurposeThe equipment can be equipped with external counters, such as a coin controller, copy key card, and key copy counter. With any of these counters installed, it is required to use this code to have the equip-ment detect a type of the counter installed.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, a type of counter installed on the equipment is detected.

0: No external copy counter/controller device1: Coin controller2: Copy key card3: Key copy counter* Default: 0

Setting TimingWhen any of the above counters is installed on the equipment or when any of the above counter types is changed, use this code to reset the set value.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 6

Page 81: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-203

Equipment Adjustment Mode Display

PurposeThere are two types of modes; shipment adjustment mode used in the field after a factory shipment and a line adjustment mode used before a factory shipment. This code is used to check in which adjustment mode the equipment is set.Since the shipment adjustment mode is set for the field, it is not necessary to perform this code. Leave the default (factory shipment adjustment mode).

DescriptionWhen this code is used, the adjustment mode of the equipment (adjustment mode for factory shipment / line adjustment mode) can be checked.

0: For factory shipment1: For line* Default: 0

Setting TimingUse this code to check the adjustment mode of the equipment.

CautionLeave the default ("0" for factory shipment) for this code.

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 7

Page 82: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-204

Auto-Clear Timer Setting

PurposeIf no button is pressed for a certain period of time during or after the copy operation, etc., the auto-clear function will automatically reset the current copy settings to the default settings and display the basic screen. This code is used to reset a desired period of time until the auto-clear function starts up.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, a period of time from the last button operation until the start-up of the auto-clear function is reset. As the set value is increased, the period of time until the auto-clear function starts up becomes longer. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the period of time becomes shorter. When "0" is set, the auto-clear function is disabled.

0: Auto-clear function disabled1: 15 seconds 6: 90 seconds 11: 180 seconds2: 30 seconds 7: 105 seconds 12: 210 seconds3: 45 seconds 8: 120 seconds 13: 240 seconds4: 60 seconds 9: 135 seconds 14: 270 seconds5: 75 seconds 10: 150 seconds 15: 300 seconds* Default: 3 (45 seconds)

* On the e-STUDIO165/205, the period of time until the auto-clear function starts up is set according to the following operation:To set on the control panel:

[USER FUNCTIONS] --> [DEFAULT SETTINGS] --> [GENERAL SETTINGS] --> [TIMERS] --> [AUTO CLEAR]

To set on the TopAccess (only when the Network Printer Kit is installed):[Administration] --> [Setup] --> [General] --> [Energy Save] --> [Auto Clear]

Setting TimingAt the request of a user, use this code to reset the period of time until the auto-clear function starts up or to disable the auto-clear function.

CautionWhen "0" is set, the auto-clear function is disabled. The current settings (displayed on the control panel) applied to the last operation are retained until the [FUNCTION CLEAR] button is pressed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 8

Page 83: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-205

Auto Power Save Mode Timer Setting

PurposeEnergy saver mode is intended to automatically lower the temperature of the fuser unit in order to reduce power consumption, when the equipment has been in an idle state for a certain period of time. This code is used to enable energy saver mode by resetting a period of time until the equipment switches to energy saver mode.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, the period of time from when the equipment is used last time to when the equipment switches to energy saver mode is reset. As the set value is increased, the period of time until the equipment switches to energy saver mode becomes longer. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the period of time becomes shorter. In addition, when "0" is set, energy saver mode is dis-abled.

e-STUDIO163/203:0: Disabled1: Reserved 7: Reserved 13: 25 minutes 19: 55 minutes 25: 110 minutes2: 1 minute 8: 5 minutes 14: 30 minutes 20: 60 minutes 26: 120 minutes3: Reserved 9: Reserved 15: 35 minutes 21: 70 minutes 27: 150 minutes4: 2 minutes 10: 10 minutes 16: 40 seconds 22: 80 minutes 28: 180 minutes5: Reserved 11: 15 minutes 17: 45 seconds 23: 90 minutes 29: 210 minutes6: 4 minutes 12: 20 minutes 18: 50 minutes 24: 100 minutes 30: 240 minutes* Default: 11

e-STUDIO165/205:0: Disabled 1: Enabled* Default: 1* The period of time until the equipment switches to energy saver mode is set according to the fol-

lowing operation:The period of time to set is the same as for the e-STUDIO163/203.

To set on the control panel:[USER FUNCTIONS] --> [DEFAULT SETTINGS] --> [GENERAL SETTINGS] --> [TIMERS] --> [AUTO POWER SAVE]

To set on the TopAccess (only when the Network Printer Kit is installed):[Administration] --> [Setup] --> [General] --> [Energy Save] --> [Auto Power Save]

Setting TimingUse this code to reset a period of time until the equipment switches to energy saver mode.

CautionIf the period of time set for "Auto power save mode timer setting (05-205)" is equal to or longer than the one set for "Auto shutoff mode timer setting (Sleep mode) (08-206)", it will be overridden by the period of time until the equipment switches to sleep mode. The equipment will not switch to energy saver mode.

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 9

Page 84: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-206

Auto Shutoff Mode Timer Setting (Sleep Mode)

PurposeSleep mode is intended to automatically turn the fuser unit OFF in order to reduce power consumption, when the equipment has been in an idle state for a certain period of time. This code is used to enable sleep mode by resetting a period of time until the equipment switches to sleep mode.However, power is supplied to the optional boards including the FAX Kit and Network Printer Kit in sleep mode, therefore, the equipment starts up when a fax is received or a request to print from the net-work is made.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, the period of time from when the equipment is used last time to when the equipment switches to sleep mode is reset. As the set value is increased, the period of time until the equipment switches to sleep mode becomes longer. On the other hand, as it is decreased, the period of time becomes shorter. In addition, when "23" is set for the e-STUDIO163/203 and “0” for the e-STUDIO165/205, sleep mode is disabled.

e-STUDIO163/203:0: 3 minutes 6: 30 minutes 12: 60 minutes 18: 120 minutes1: 5 minutes 7: 35 minutes 13: 70 minutes 19: 150 minutes2: 10 minutes 8: 40 minutes 14: 80 minutes 20: 180 minutes3: 15 minutes 9: 45 minutes 15: 90 minutes 21: 210 minutes4: 20 minutes 10: 50 minutes 16: 100 seconds 22: 240 minutes5: 25 minutes 11: 55 minutes 17: 110 seconds 23: Disabled* Default: 3

e-STUDIO165/205:0: Disabled 1: Enabled* Default: 1* The period of time until the equipment switches to sleep mode is set according to the following

operation:The period of time to set is the same as for the e-STUDIO163/203.

To set on the control panel:[USER FUNCTIONS] --> [DEFAULT SETTINGS] --> [GENERAL SETTINGS] --> [TIMERS] --> [AUTO SLEEP]

To set on the TopAccess (only when the Network Printer Kit is installed):[Administration] --> [Setup] --> [General] --> [Energy Save] --> [Sleep/Auto Shut Off]

Setting TimingUse this code to reset a period of time until the equipment switches to sleep mode.

CautionIf the period of time set for "Auto power save mode timer setting (05-205)" is equal to or longer than the one set for "Auto shutoff mode timer setting (Sleep mode) (08-206)", it will be overridden by the period of time until the equipment switches to sleep mode. The equipment will not switch to energy saver mode.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 10

Page 85: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-209

Default Setting of Filing Format when E-mailing

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit, Scanner Upgrade Kit and External Keyboard

are installed.

PurposeThis code is used to specify the file format, which is displayed as the default on the setting screen and used by priority, when the scanned original data is sent by e-mail.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, the file format, which is used by priority, is reset.

0: TIFF (Multi)1: PDF* Default: 1

Setting TimingAt the request of a user, use this code to reset the file format, which is used by priority, when the scanned original data is sent by e-mail.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 11

Page 86: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-219

Default Setting of Filing Format when Storing Files (Scanner Function)

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit, Scanner Upgrade Kit and External Keyboard

are installed.

PurposeThis code is used to specify the file format, which is displayed as the default on the setting screen and used by priority, when the scanner function is used to store the scanned original data in a shared folder.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, the file format, which is used by priority, is reset.

0: TIFF (Multi)1: PDF2: Reserved3: TIFF (Single)* Default: 0

Setting TimingAt the request of a user, use this code to reset the file format, which is used by priority, when the scanned original data is stored in a shared folder.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 12

Page 87: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-224 to 228

Paper Size

* Codes 08-225, 227 and 228 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

PurposeThese codes are used to have the equipment detect the size of paper loaded in each drawer and the bypass tray. This allows the APS (Automatic Paper Selection), paper transport and jam detection to be performed, depending on paper size.

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:

DescriptionWhen these codes are used, the equipment detects the size of paper loaded in each paper source.

Set value = Size of paper to be loaded

0: A3 4: B4 8: LT-R 12:COMP1: A4 5: B5 9: LD 13: FOLIO2: A4-R 6: B5-R 10: LG 14: Non-standard3: A5-R 7: LT 11: ST-R 15: Postcard* “14” and “15” can be selected only for the paper size for the bypass tray (08-224).

* Default:• Bypass tray: 14 (No particular size is specified)• Drawer: UC: 7, Others: 1• PFU Drawer: UC: 7, Others: 1• PFP upper Drawer: UC: 7, Others: 1• PFP lower Drawer: UC: 7, Others: 1

* The paper size is set on the control panel according to the following operation:e-STUDIO163/203:

Press [DRAWER] + [COPY] for two seconds --> [DRAWER] --> [COPY]e-STUDIO165/205:

[USER FUNCTIONS] --> [DEFAULT SETTINGS] --> [GENERAL SETTINGS] --> [DRAWER SIZE]

Setting TimingUse these codes to reset the paper size for each drawer.

CautionIf the paper size different from the actual size of paper loaded is set for 08-225 to 228, a jam may occur and the back of paper may be smudged.

Code Applied to08-224 Paper size for the bypass tray08-225 Paper size for the drawer08-226 Paper size for the PFU drawer08-227 Paper size for the PFP upper drawer08-228 Paper size for the PFP lower drawer

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 13

Page 88: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-229 to 242/244/245/337 to 341/471

Paper Size (Feeding/Widthwise Direction)

* Codes 08-337 to 341 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

PurposeThese codes are used to have the equipment detect the size of each type of paper in mm in the feeding direction and widthwise direction.The values set here are also used to define the range of an image printed on paper.* Paper feeding is controlled based on the paper size selected; therefore, the actual paper size must

correspond with the set value. Unless the actual paper size corresponds with the set value, a jam may be generated during the paper feed operation.

DescriptionThe table below shows the setting codes and their applications:

* The value for each code in the feeding direction and widthwise direction varies according to sub code. (0: Feeding direction, 1: Widthwise direction)

Setting TimingAt the request of a user, use a special paper size (other than that listed in the above table) in each drawer (this operation is not guaranteed).

CautionUse the above default value, unless otherwise required.

Code Applied to Default(Feeding/ widthwise)

Acceptable value

08-229 Paper size (A3-R) 420/297 140 to 43208-230 Paper size (A4-R) 297/21008-231 Paper size (A5-R) 210/14808-232 Paper size (B4) 364/25708-233 Paper size (B5-R) 257/18208-234 Paper size (LT-R) 279/21608-235 Paper size (LD) 432/27908-236 Paper size (LG) 356/21608-237 Paper size (ST-R) 216/14008-238 Paper size (COMPUTER) 356/25708-239 Paper size (FOLIO) 330/21008-240 Paper size (13” LG) 330/21608-241 Paper size (8.5” x 8.5”) 216/21608-242 Paper size (Non-standard) 432/279 105 to 43208-244 Paper size (8K) 390/270 140 to 43208-245 Paper size (16K-R) 270/195 140 to 43208-337 Paper size (Envelope: COM10-R) 241/105 105 to 43208-338 Paper size (Envelope: DL-R) 220/110 105 to 43208-339 Paper size (Envelope: Monarch-R) 191/98 98 to 43208-340 Paper size (Envelope: CHO-3-R) 235/120 105 to 43208-341 Paper size (Envelope: YOU-3-R) 235/105 105 to 43208-471 Paper size (Postcard) 148/100 100 to 432

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 14

Page 89: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-246

Clearing Copy Jobs at Auto Clear

PurposeThis code is used to specify whether or not to clear the copy job entered, when the auto-clear period of time passes while the copy operation is suspended.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, whether or not to automatically clear the copy job is reset.

0: Does not clear1: Clears* Default: 0

Setting TimingAt the request of a user, use this code to automatically clear the copy job.

CautionNo copy job is cleared even if the auto-clear period of time passes during the menu operation.

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 15

Page 90: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-250

Service Technician Telephone Number

PurposeWhen a service call appears, a telephone number of a service technician can be displayed on the con-trol panel. No telephone number is displayed by default. This code is used to enter and display the tele-phone number.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, a telephone number of a service technician is entered, and displayed on the screen when a service call appears.

Set value = Telephone number of a service technician

* Acceptable value: 20-digit numeric value* Default: 0 (No telephone number is displayed)

Setting TimingUse this code to display the telephone number when a service call appears.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 16

Page 91: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-251

Setting Value of PM Counter

PurposeThe Preventive Maintenance (PM) needs to be performed to clean the parts, lubricate the driving units and replace consumables. This code is used to specify the PM cycle (copy counts). At the moment when the PM counter value of "Current value of PM counter display/0 clearing (08-252)" reaches the set value for the code, the message will appear, prompting for the PM.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, the PM cycle (copy counts) is shown up to an 8-digit numeric value.

Set value = Copy counts prompting for the PM

0: Message will not appear, prompting for the PM1 to 99999999 (copy counts)* Default: e-STUDIO163: JPN: 0, Others: 72,000

e-STUDIO165: JPN: 0, Others: 72,000e-STUDIO205: JPN: 0, Others: 90,000

Setting TimingUse this code to reset the PM cycle.

CautionUse the above default value, unless otherwise required.

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 17

Page 92: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-252

Current Value of PM Counter Display / 0 Clearing

PurposeThe PM counter is intended to count the number of copies as a guide for estimating the next PM (Pre-ventive Maintenance) timing. This code is used to display and to check the current PM counter value for estimating the general PM timing. In addition, when "0" is set after the PM is performed, the counter will be reset to 0 and incremented again, which helps to estimate the next PM timing.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, the current value of the PM counter is shown up to an 8-digit numeric value. Note that only "0" can be manually entered to reset the PM counter to 0, after the PM is performed.

0: Clear the counter1 to 99999999 (copy counts)* Default: 0

Setting TimingUse this code to reset the current counter value to 0, after the PM is performed.

Caution• Reset the counter to 0, only after performing the PM. Otherwise, the next PM timing cannot be accu-

rately estimated. The image quality may be reduced and some failure may occur in the equipment.• The PM counter value is stored in the SRAM board.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 18

Page 93: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-253

Error History Display

PurposeDuring the equipment operation, if an error occurs, the type of error, time when the error occurred, cur-rent reproduction ratio and paper source for recording paper, etc., are stored as error data. This code is used to display data for the last 8 errors on the control panel in order to check the status of the equip-ment in the even of an error.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, data for the last 8 errors are listed on the screen. Error data is shown, as indi-cated below:

EA10 03 07 26 17 5 32 064 064 2 3 6 2 1 0 0 0 0 0 0Error code Y / M / D / H / M / S MMM NNN A B C D E F H I J L O

(4 digits) (12 digits) (3 digits) (3 digits) (11 digits)

* The table below shows the descriptions of the symbols:

* The error records displayed on the e-STUDIO163/203 are switched using the [ZOOM] ([25%] / [[200%]] button.

Setting TimingUse this code to check the status of the equipment in the even of an error, for the purpose of analyzing a cause for the error.

MMM Reproduction ratio in the primary scanning direction (in hexadecimal) (M x 256) + (M x 16) + MNNN Reproduction ratio in the secondary scanning direction (in hexadecimal) (N x 256) + (N x 16) + NA Paper source

0: Not used 1: Bypass feed 2: LCF 3: PFP upper drawer 4: Not used 5: PFP lower drawer 6: Not used 7: Upper drawer 8: Lower drawer

B Paper size code0: A5/ST 1: A5-R 2: ST-R 3: LT 4: A4 5: B5-R 6: LT-R 7- A4-R 8: OTHER/UNIV 9: B5A: FOLIO/COMP B: LG C: B4 D: LD E: A3 F: 13"LG H: A6-R I: Post card J: 8.5"SQ K: Unused L: Unused M: 8K N: 16K-R O: 16K P: COM10 (Envelope) Q: DL (Envelope) R: Monarch (Envelope) S: CHO-3 (Envelope) T: YOU-4 (Envelope) Z: Not used

C Sort mode/staple mode0: Non-sort/Non-staple 1: Group 2: Sort 7: Front staple 8: Double staple 9: Rear staple A: Saddle stitch

D ADF mode0: Not used 1: AUTO FEED (SADF) 2: STACK FEED

E APS/AMS mode0: Not used 1: APS 2: AMS

F Duplex mode0: Not specified 1: Book 2: Double-sided /simplex printing 4: Double-sided/Duplex printing 8: Single-sided/ Duplex printing

H Image shift 0: Not used 1: Book-type 2: Left 4: Right

I Editing0: Unused 1: Masking 2: Trimming 3: Mirror image 4: Negative/Positive reversal

J Edge erase/Dual-page0: Unused 1: Edge erase 2: Dual-page 3: Edge erase & Dual-page

L Function0: Unused 1: Copying 2: FAX/Internet FAX transmission 3: FAX/Internet FAX/E-mail reception printing 4: Unused 5: Printing/List print 6: Scan/E-mail transmission

O Mode2: Black

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 19

Page 94: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 20

Page 95: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-254

LT<->A4/LD<->A3

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

PurposeWhen the network printer function is used to print, this code is used to specify whether or not to print on a different size of paper, unless a specified size of paper is available.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, whether or not to print a document, which should be printed on LT/LD-sized paper, on A4/A3-sized paper, is specified, unless LT/LD-sized paper is available, and vice versa.

0: Enabled1: Disabled (A message will appear to prompt a user to use a specified size of paper.)* Default: 0

* This is set on the TopAccess according to the following operation:[Administration] --> [Setup] --> [Printer] --> [LT < --> A4/LD <--> A3]

Setting TimingAt the request of a user, use this code to specify how to print out a document when the network printer function is used to print, unless a specified size of paper is available.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 21

Page 96: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-255

PFP Installation

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

PurposeThis code is used to specify the installation condition of the optional PFP (Paper Feed Pedestal).The PFP is automatically recognized; therefore, use this code in the following cases:

Case 1:To reset from "2: PFP dual-drawer type installed" to "1: PFP single-drawer type installed" (When only the 2nd drawer of the PFP is broken, etc.)

Case 2:To forcibly set to "4: Not installed" (When the 1st drawer or entire PFP is broken, etc.)

Case 3:To install the new PFP from "4: Not installed" (When a replacement unit is installed in the condition in Case 2, etc.)

DescriptionWhen this code is use, the installation condition of the PFP is reset.

0: Automatic (Detects installation condition automatically)1: PFP single-drawer type installed2: PFP dual-drawer type installed3: Reserved4: Not installed* Default: 0

* The PFP dual-drawer type is installed while “1” is set, “2” is automatically replaced with “1” at power-on.

Setting TimingUse this code when the new PFP is installed.

Caution• If "0: Automatic” is not set, perform this code according to the actual installation, when the PFP

installation condition is reset (Cases 1 to 3 in Purpose). If this code is not performed, the PFP is not recognized as a setup product.

• Regarding Case 3 in Purpose, remove the failed unit (disconnect electrically), in order to install a replacement unit in the condition of Case 2. Then set to "0: Automatic (Detects installation condition automatically)" and install the replacement unit for the PFP.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 22

Page 97: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-258

FSMS Acceptance

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

PurposeThe utility software, FSMS (Field Service Manager System) allows a service technician to download firmware to update, via a PC connected to the equipment. Before that, it is necessary to permit the FSMS connection.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, whether or not to permit the FSMS connection is specified. In addition, a type of communication interface is selected.

0: Prohibited1: Permitted (serial connection only)2: Permitted (serial and USB connections)* Default: 0

Setting TimingUse this code to permit the FSMS connection, in order to use the FSMS to update firmware.

CautionConnect the FSMS to the equipment while "1" is set, when the USB is used. (The communication inter-face is automatically switched to the USB connection during communications)

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 23

Page 98: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-260

Web Data Retention Period

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

PurposeWhen the equipment has been in an idle state for a certain period of time during the entry operation on the TopAccess, data, which is being entered, is automatically reset. This code is used to set the period of time until data is reset.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, the timeout period, which is being entered on the TopAccess, is reset. If a tim-eout occurs, data, which is being entered, is reset.

Set value = Timeout period

0 to 999 (minutes)* Default: 10 (minutes)

Setting TimingAt the request of a user, use this code to reset the period of time until the value, which is being entered on the TopAccess, reaches the timeout and is reset.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 24

Page 99: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-261

Fixes the Paper Size Setting for the Bypass Tray

PurposeThis code is used to specify whether or not to fix the paper size for the bypass tray to a specified size.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, the operation to fix a paper size for the bypass tray is set.With the main switch turned OFF or the [FUNCTION CLEAR] button pressed, unless a paper size is fixed, [Non-standard] is set. If it is fixed, the paper size set for code 08-224 is set.

0: Size not fixed (bypass non-standard mode)1: Size fixed (bypass fixed mode)* Default: 0

Setting TimingAt the request of a user, use this code to fix the paper size for the bypass tray to a specified size.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 25

Page 100: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-263

Administrator's Password

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

PurposeA user (or an administrator of the equipment) authorized to access the equipment management func-tions on the TopAccess, is limited. This code is used to display the administrator's password, which needs to be entered, in order to access the management functions.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, the administrator's password is displayed.

Set value = Administrator's password (6- to 10- digit numeric value)

* Acceptable values: 0000000000 to 9999999999* Default: 123456

* The administrator's password is set on the TopAccess according to the following operation:[Administration] --> [Setup] --> [General] --> [Administrator’s Password]

Setting TimingUse this code to check the administrator's password.

CautionIf a new password is registered or reset, remember to inform the equipment administrator of the new password.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 26

Page 101: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-265

Maximum Data Capacity at E-mailing

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit, Scanner Upgrade Kit and External Keyboard

are installed.

PurposeThis code is used to specify the maximum data capacity when e-mail is transmitted in the scan opera-tion.If the transmitted data exceeds the maximum data capacity set for this code, an error message, which shows exceeding file capacity, appears.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, the maximum data capacity is reset, when e-mail is transmitted in the scan operation.

2 to 30 (Mbytes)* Default: 30 (Mbytes)

Setting TimingAt the request of a user, use this code to reset the maximum data capacity when e-mail is transmitted in the scan operation.

CautionUse the above default value, unless otherwise required. As the set value is decreased, the error mes-sage is more likely to appear due to an excess of file capacity.

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 27

Page 102: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-266

Maximum Data Capacity at Internet FAX

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* This code is valid only when the FAX Kit, Network Printer Kit and External Keyboard are installed.

PurposeThis code is used to specify the maximum data capacity when a fax is transmitted through the Internet.If the transmitted data exceeds the maximum capacity set for this code, an error message, which shows exceeding file capacity, appears.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, the maximum data capacity is reset, when a fax is transmitted through the Internet.

2 to 30 (Mbytes)* Default: 30 (Mbytes)

Setting TimingAt the request of a user, use this code to reset the maximum data capacity when a fax is transmitted through the Internet.

CautionUse the above default value, unless otherwise required. As the set value is decreased, the error mes-sage is more likely to appear due to an excess of file capacity.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 28

Page 103: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-273

Default Setting of Partial Size when Transmitting E-mail

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* This code is valid only when the FAX Kit, Network Printer Kit, Scanner Upgrade Kit and External

Keyboard are installed.

PurposeWhen e-mail is transmitted in the scan operation, it can be divided into multiple pieces of e-mail on a 2Mbyte-basis at the maximum. This code is used to specify the initial value of the partial size selection button, which is displayed as the default on the setting screen and used by priority.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, the e-mail transmission partial size is reset.

0: Not divided1: 64k bytes2: 128k bytes3: 256k bytes4: 512k bytes5: 1024k bytes6: 2048k bytes* Default: 0

Setting TimingUse this code to reset the initial value of the e-mail transmission partial size, when e-mail is transmitted in the scan operation.

CautionIf "0 (Not divided)" is set, e-mail is transmitted as a piece of e-mail without being divided. The maximum acceptable transmission capacity is determined for "Maximum data capacity at e-mailing (08-265)" (2 to 30Mbytes).

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 29

Page 104: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-274

Default Setting of Partial Size when Transmitting Internet FAX

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* This code is valid only when the FAX Kit, Network Printer Kit, Scanner Upgrade Kit and External

Keyboard are installed.

PurposeWhen e-mail is transmitted through the Internet, it can be divided into multiple pieces of e-mail on a 2Mbyte-basis at the maximum. This code is used to specify the initial value of the partial size selection button, which is displayed as the default on the setting screen and used by priority.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, the Internet FAX transmission partial size is reset.

0: Not divided1: 256k bytes2: 512k bytes3: 1024k bytes4: 2048k bytes* Default: 0

Setting TimingUse this code to reset the initial value of the e-mail transmission partial size, when e-mail is transmitted through the Internet.

CautionIf "0 (Not divided)" is set, e-mail is transmitted as a piece of e-mail without being divided. The maximum acceptable transmission capacity is determined for "Maximum data capacity at Internet FAX (08-266)" (2 to 30Mbytes).

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 30

Page 105: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-276

Default Setting of Density Adjustment (Scanner Function)

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit, Scanner Upgrade Kit and External Keyboard

are installed.

PurposeThis code is used to specify the initial value of the density adjustment button, which is used as the default by priority, when the scanner function is used.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, the position of the density adjustment button, which is used by priority, during the scan operation, is reset.

0: Automatic density3: Step -34: Step -25: Step -16: Step 0 (center)7: Step +18: Step +29: Step +3* Default: 0

Setting TimingAt the request of a user, use this code to reset the position of the density adjustment button, which is used by priority, during the scan operation.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 31

Page 106: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-281

Default Setting of Resolution (Scanner Function)

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit, Scanner Upgrade Kit and External Keyboard

are installed.

PurposeThis code is used to specify the scanning resolution, which is used as the default by priority, when the scanner function is used.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, the scanning resolution, which is used by priority, during the scan operation, is reset.

0: 150 dpi1: 200 dpi2: 300 dpi3: 400 dpi4: 600 dpi* Default: 1

Setting TimingAt the request of a user, use this code to reset the scanning resolution, which is used by priority, during the scan operation.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 32

Page 107: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-283

Default Setting of Original Mode (Scanner Function)

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit, Scanner Upgrade Kit and External Keyboard

are installed.

PurposeThis code is used to specify the original mode, which is used as the default by priority, when the scan-ner function is used.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, the original mode, which is used by priority, during the scan operation, is reset.

0: Text1: Text/photo2: Photo* Default: 0

Setting TimingAt the request of a user, use this code to reset the original mode, which is used by priority, during the scan operation.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 33

Page 108: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-284

Default Setting of Duplexing Mode (Scanner Function)

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit, Scanner Upgrade Kit and External Keyboard

are installed.

PurposeThis code is used to specify the duplexing mode, which is displayed as the default on the setting screen and used by priority, when the scanner function is used.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, the duplexing mode, which is used by priority, during the scan operation, is reset.

0: Single1: Book (left/right margin)2: Tablet (top/bottom margin)* Default: 0

Setting TimingAt the request of a user, use this code to reset the duplexing mode, which is used by priority during the scan operation.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 34

Page 109: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-285

Default Setting of Image Rotation Mode (Scanner Function)

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit, Scanner Upgrade Kit and External Keyboard

are installed.

PurposeThis code is used to specify the image rotation mode, which is displayed as the default on the setting screen and used by priority, when the scanner function is used.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, the image rotation mode, which is used by priority, during the scan operation, is reset.

0: 0 degree (OFF)1: 90 degrees (ON)* Default: 0

Setting TimingAt the request of a user, use this code to reset the image rotation mode, which is used by priority, during the scan operation.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 35

Page 110: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-286

Default Setting of Original Size (Scanner Function)

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit, Scanner Upgrade Kit and External Keyboard

are installed.

PurposeThis code is used to specify the original size, which is displayed as the default on the setting screen and used by priority, when the scanner function is used.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, the original size, which is used by priority, during the scan operation, is reset.

0: Automatic1: Size mixed* Default: 0

Setting TimingAt the request of a user, use this code to reset the original size, which is used by priority, during the scan operation.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 36

Page 111: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-290 to 293/296 to 299/978/979

Raw Print Job

* These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

PurposeThese codes are used to specify the print properties, which are used, when a Raw print job is sent to the printer.The Raw print job refers to a print job, which does not contain any special print job information, such as a print job sent to the printer when the printer driver (PCL or PS) is not used.

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:

Description08-290: Duplex

This code is used to specify duplex printing for the Raw print job.0: Valid (duplex) 1: Invalid (simplex)* Default: 1

08-291: Paper SizeThis code is used to specify a paper size for the Raw print job.0: LD 4: ST 8: Reserved 12: 13” LG1: LG 5: A3 9: B42: LT 6: A4 10: B53: COMP 7: A5 11: FOLIO* Default: UC: 2, EUR/JPN: 6

08-292: Paper TypeThis code is used to specify a paper type for the Raw print job.0: Plain paper1: Thick paper 12: Thick paper 23: Reserved4: Transparency film* Default: 0

Code Applied to08-290 Duplex08-291 Paper Size08-292 Paper Type08-293 Paper Orientation08-296 Number of Form Lines08-297 PCL Font Pitch08-298 PCL Font Size08-299 PCL Font Number08-978 Drawer08-979 PCL Symbol Set

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 37

Page 112: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-293: Paper OrientationThis code is used to specify a paper orientation for the Raw print job.0: Portrait1: Landscape* Default: 0

08-296: Number of Form LinesThis code is used to specify the line feed width.500 to 12,800: Unit: 1/100 point (point = 1/72 inch)* Default: 1,200 (12 points)

08-297: PCL Font PitchThis code is used to specify the number of characters per inch, when the fixed-pitch font is used.44 to 9,999: Unit: 1/100 CPI (character per inch)* Default: 1,000 (10 CPI)

08-298: PCL Font SizeThis code is used specify the font size, when the proportional font is used400 to 99,975: Unit: 1/100 point (point = 1/72 inch)* Default: 1,200 (12 points)

08-299: PCL Font NumberThis code is used to specify a PCL font number used for the Raw print job.0 to 79* Default: 0 (Courier is used.)

08-978: Drawer DisplayThis code is used to specify a drawer displayed by default for the Raw print job.0: AUTO1: Drawer2: PFU drawer3: PFP upper drawer4: PFP lower drawer* Default: 0

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 38

Page 113: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-979: Symbol Set DisplayThis code is used to specify a drawer displayed by default for the Raw print job.0: Roman-8 20: Pi Font1: ISO 8859/1 Latin 1 21: Legal2: ISO 8859/2 Latin 2 22: ISO 4: United Kingdom3: ISO 8859/9 Latin 5 23: ISO 6:ASCII4: PC-8, Code Page 437 24: ISO 115: PC-8 D/N, Danish/Norwegian 25: ISO 15: Italian6: PC-850, Multilingual 26: ISO 177: PC-852, Latin2 27: ISO 21: German8: PC-8 Turkish 28: ISO 60: Danish/Norwegian9: Windows 3.1 Latin 1 29: ISO 69: French10: Windows 3.1 Latin 2 30: Windows 3.0 Latin 111: Windows 3.1 Latin 5 31: MC Text12: DeskTop 32: PC Cyrillic13: PS Text 33: ITC Zapf Dingbats14: Ventura International 34: ISO 8859/10 Latin 615: Ventura US 35: PC-77516: Microsoft Publishing 36: PC-100417: Math-8 37: Symbol18: PS Math 38: Windows Baltic19: Ventura Math 39: Wingdings* Default: 0

* The above Raw print jobs are set on the TopAccess according to the following operation:[Administration] --> [Setup] --> [Printer]

Setting TimingAt the request of a user, use these codes to reset the print properties for the Raw print job.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 39

Page 114: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-300

Maximum Copy Count (Copy Function)

PurposeThis code is used to specify the maximum copy count when multiple copies are made per job.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, the maximum copy count per job is specified.

Set value = Maximum copy count

0: 9991: 992: 9* Default: 0

Setting TimingAt the request of a user, use this code to reset the maximum copy count per job.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 40

Page 115: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-305 to 308

Print Counter Display (by Paper Size)

* These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

PurposeThese codes are used to check by displaying the current values (print counts) of the print counters (copy counter, Fax counter, printer counter and list counter) by paper size. This is done according to "Count setting of large size paper (08-352)" and "Definition setting of large size paper (08-353)."

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:

[Copy counter (by paper size): Print counts]

[Printer counter (by paper size): Print counts]

[List counter (by paper size): Print counts]

Code Sub code Applied to Sub code Applied to Function mode08-305 0 A3 9 LT Copy

1 A4 10 ST2 A5 11 COMP3 A6 12 13” LG4 B4 13 8.5”” x 8.5”5 B5 14 16K6 FOLIO 15 8K7 LD 16 Others8 LG

Code Sub code Applied to Sub code Applied to Function mode08-306 0 A3 9 LT Printer

1 A4 10 ST2 A5 11 COMP3 A6 12 13" LG4 B4 13 8.5" x 8.5"5 B5 14 16K6 FOLIO 15 8K7 LD 16 Others8 LG

Code Sub code Applied to Sub code Applied to Function mode08-307 0 A3 9 LT Printer

1 A4 10 ST2 A5 11 COMP3 A6 12 13" LG4 B4 13 8.5" x 8.5"5 B5 14 16K6 FOLIO 15 8K7 LD 16 Others8 LG

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 41

Page 116: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

[Fax counter (by paper size): Print counts]

DescriptionWhen these codes are used, the current value of each print counter is shown up to an 8 digit numeric value.

* 0 to 99999999* Default: 0

Setting TimingUse these codes to check each counter value when the maintenance is performed or the print count is calculated.

CautionAlthough the digital keys are used to enter the counter value, basically do not enter the counter value. Once it is entered, there is no way to undo it.

Code Sub code Applied to Sub code Applied to Function mode08-308 0 A3 9 LT Fax

1 A4 10 ST2 A5 11 COMP3 A6 12 13" LG4 B4 13 8.5" x 8.5"5 B5 14 16K6 FOLIO 15 8K7 LD 16 Others8 LG

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 42

Page 117: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-312 to 314

Scan Counter Display (by Paper Size)

* These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

PurposeThese codes are used to check by displaying the current values (scan counts) of the scan counters (copy counter, network counter and Fax counter) by paper size.

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:

[Copy counter (by paper size): Scan counts]

[Scanner counter (by paper size): Scan counts]

[Fax counter (by paper size): Scan counts]

Code Sub code Applied to Sub code Applied to Function mode08-312 0 A3 9 LT Copy

1 A4 10 ST2 A5 11 COMP3 A6 12 13" LG4 B4 13 8.5" x 8.5"5 B5 14 16K6 FOLIO 15 8K7 LD 16 Others8 LG

Code Sub code Applied to Sub code Applied to Function mode08-313 0 A3 9 LT Scanner

1 A4 10 ST2 A5 11 COMP3 A6 12 13" LG4 B4 13 8.5" x 8.5"5 B5 14 16K6 FOLIO 15 8K7 LD 16 Others8 LG

Code Sub code Applied to Sub code Applied to Function mode08-314 0 A3 9 LT Fax

1 A4 10 ST2 A5 11 COMP3 A6 12 13" LG4 B4 13 8.5" x 8.5"5 B5 14 16K6 FOLIO 15 8K7 LD 16 Others8 LG

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 43

Page 118: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

DescriptionWhen these codes are used, the current value of each scan counter is shown up to an 8 digit numeric value.

* 0 to 99999999* Default: 0

Setting TimingUse these codes to check each counter value when the maintenance is performed or the scan count is calculated.

CautionUse these codes to check each counter value when the maintenance is performed or the scan count is calculated.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 44

Page 119: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-315/316

Number of Transmitted/Received Pages in FAX Function

* These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

PurposeThese codes are used to check by displaying the current values (transmission/reception counts) of the Fax communication counters by paper size.

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:

[Fax transmission counter (by paper size): Fax transmission counts]

[Fax reception counter (by paper size): Fax reception counts]

DescriptionWhen these codes are used, the current value of the Fax transmission/reception counter is shown up to an 8 digit numeric value.

* 0 to 99999999* Default: 0

Setting TimingUse these codes to check each counter value when the maintenance is performed or the Fax transmis-sion/reception count is calculated.

CautionAlthough the digital keys are used to enter the counter value, basically do not enter the counter value. Once it is entered, there is no way to undo it.

Code Sub code Applied to Sub code Applied to Function mode08-315 0 A3 9 LT Fax

1 A4 10 ST2 A5 11 COMP3 A6 12 13" LG4 B4 13 8.5" x 8.5"5 B5 14 16K6 FOLIO 15 8K7 LD 16 Others8 LG

Code Sub code Applied to Sub code Applied to Function mode08-316 0 A3 9 LT Fax

1 A4 10 ST2 A5 11 COMP3 A6 12 13" LG4 B4 13 8.5" x 8.5"5 B5 14 16K6 FOLIO 15 8K7 LD 16 Others8 LG

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 45

Page 120: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-320 to 323

Print Counter Display (By Large/Small Size)

* These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

PurposeThe print counters include a copy counter, a printer counter, a list counter and a Fax counter. Each counter is intended to accumulate print counts by paper size (small/large size). These codes are used to display and check the current value of each print counter.* The print counters can also be displayed by the operation on the control panel.

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:

DescriptionWhen these codes are used, the current value of each counter is shown up to an 8 digit numeric value.

* 0 to 99999999* Default: 0

Counting conditions are as follows.• Small size: The print counter is incremented by 1, every time a sheet of small size paper

(designated paper size other than large size paper) is printed.• Large size: The print counter is incremented by 1, every time a sheet of large size paper is

printed.However, the print counter is incremented by 2, every time a sheet of large size paper is printed.* Large size paper setting (08-353)* Large size paper double count setting (08-352)

• Total: The sum of large size and small size paper is counted.

Setting TimingUse these codes to check each counter value when the maintenance is performed or the print count is calculated.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

Code Sub code Applied to Function mode08-320 0 Copy counter (large size) Fax

1 Copy counter (small size)2 Copy counter (total)

08-321 0 Printer counter (large size) Printer1 Printer counter (small size)2 Printer counter (total)

08-322 0 List counter (large size)1 List counter (small size)2 List counter (total)

08-323 0 Fax counter (large size) Fax1 Fax counter (small size)2 Fax counter (total)

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 46

Page 121: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-327 to 329

Scan Counter Display

* These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

PurposeThe scan counters include a copy counter, a scanner counter, and a Fax counter. Each counter is intended to accumulate scan counts by paper size (small/large size). These codes are used to display and check the current value of each scan counter.* Scan counts of each counter can be displayed by the operation on the control panel. However, these

codes are used to display scan counts by small/large size.

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:

DescriptionWhen these codes are used, the current value of each scan counter is shown up to an 8 digit numeric value.

* 0 to 99999999* Default: 0

Counting conditions are as follows.• Small size: The scan counter is incremented by 1, every time a sheet of small size paper

(designated paper size other than large size paper) is scanned.• Large size: The scan counter is incremented by 1, every time a sheet of large size paper is

scanned.* Large size paper setting (08-353)

• Total: The sum of large size and small size paper is counted.

Setting TimingUse these codes to check each counter value when the maintenance is performed or the scan count is calculated.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

Code Sub code Applied to Function mode08-327 0 Copy counter (large size) Copy

1 Copy counter (small size)2 Copy counter (total)

08-328 0 Fax counter (large size) Fax1 Fax counter (small size)2 Fax counter (total)

08-329 0 Scanner counter (large size) Scanner1 Scanner counter (small size)2 Scanner counter (total)

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 47

Page 122: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-330/332

Display of Number of Transmitted/Received Pages in FAX Function

* These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

PurposeThe Fax counters include a transmission and a reception counter. Each counter is intended to accumu-late Fax transmission/reception counts by paper size (small/large size). These codes are used to dis-play and check the current values of Fax transmission/reception counters.

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:

DescriptionWhen these codes are used, the current value of the Fax transmission/reception counter is shown up to an 8 digit numeric value.

* 0 to 99999999* Default: 0

Counting conditions are as follows.• Small size: The Fax communication counter is incremented by 1, every time a sheet of small

size paper (designated paper size other than large size paper) is transmitted/received by Fax.

• Large size: The Fax communication counter is incremented by 1, every time a sheet of large size paper is transmitted/received by Fax.* Large size paper setting (08-353)

• Total: The sum of large size and small size paper is counted.

Setting TimingUse these codes to check each counter value when the maintenance is performed or the Fax transmis-sion/reception count is calculated.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

Code Sub code Applied to Function mode08-330 0 Fax transmission counts (large size) Fax

1 Fax transmission counts (small size)2 Fax transmission counts (total)

08-332 0 Fax reception counts (large size)1 Fax reception counts (small size)2 Fax reception counts (total)

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 48

Page 123: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-335

Display of Total Number of Pages

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

PurposeThe counter is intended to accumulate print counts for copy printing, printer printing, Fax printing, and list printing by paper size (small/large size). This code is used to display and check total counts by paper size.

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:

DescriptionWhen this code is used, the current value of the counter is shown up to an 8 digit numeric value. The digital keys are used to enter the counter value.

0 to 99999999* Default: 0

Counting conditions are as follows.• Small size: The counter is incremented by 1, every time a sheet of small size paper

(designated paper size other than large size paper) is printed.• Large size: The counter is incremented by 1, every time a sheet of large size paper is

printed.However, the counter is incremented by 2, every time a sheet of large size paper is printed and transmitted/received.* Large size paper setting (08-353)* Large size paper double count setting (08-352)

• Total: The sum of large size and small size paper is counted.

Setting TimingUse this code to check each counter value by paper size when the maintenance is performed or the print count is calculated.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

Code Sub code Applied to08-335 0 Total counts (large size)

1 Total counts (small size)2 Total counts (total)

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 49

Page 124: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-345

Count Setting of Envelope (PM)

PurposeThis code is used to specify whether or not to increment the PM (Preventive Maintenance) related counters by 2, every time a copy or printout is made on a large size envelope.When the value set for "Paper size (feeding/widthwise direction) (08-337 to 341)" for an envelope, exceeds the length set for "Definition setting of large size paper (PM) (08-347)," the envelope is counted as a large size envelope.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, whether or not to increment the counters by 2 is specified, every time a copy or printout is made on a large size envelope.

0: Increment the counter by 11: Increment the counter by 2* Default: 1

Setting TimingUse this code to reset the PM related counters to be incremented by 1, every time a copy or printout is made on a large size envelope.

Caution• A value set for this code affects the PM support related counters (other than feeding).• This code is set to increment the PM support related counters by 2, for the time to perform the PM. If

this setting is reset, the PM will be necessary before the counters reach PM counts.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 50

Page 125: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-346

Count Setting of Large Size Paper (PM)

PurposeThis code is used to specify whether or not to increment the PM (Preventive Maintenance) related counters by 2, every time a copy or printout is made on large size paper.* The paper counted as large size paper is specified in accordance with "Definition setting of large

size paper (PM) (08-347)."

DescriptionWhen this code is used, whether or not to increment the counters by 2 is specified, every time a copy or printout is made on large size paper.

0: Increment the counter by 11: Increment the counter by 2* Default: 1

Setting TimingUse this code to reset the PM related counters to be incremented by 1, every time a copy or printout is made on large size paper.

Caution• A value set for this code affects the PM support related counters (other than feeding).• This code is set to increment the PM support related counters by 2, for the time to perform the PM. If

this setting is reset, the PM will be necessary before the counters reach PM counts.

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 51

Page 126: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-347/353

Definition Setting of Large Size Paper (PM / Fee Charging System Counter)

PurposeThese codes are used to specify whether or not to increment the counters by 2, which are involved in billing such as the total counter and key copy counter, or the counters, which are involved in the PM such as the PM support related counters, every time a copy or printout is made on large size paper. These codes are used to reset the size of paper, which is counted as large size paper. * Whether or not to increment the counters by 2 is specified in accordance with "Count setting of large

size paper (08-346/352)."

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:

DescriptionWhen these codes are used, the size of paper, which is counted as large size paper, is reset.

08-347: Definition setting of large size paper (PM)0: A3, LD1: A3, B4, FOLIO, LD, LG, COMP* Default: 1

08-353: Definition setting of large size paper (Fee charging system counter)0: A3, LD1: A3, B4, FOLIO, LD, LG, COMP, 8K* Default: 1

Setting TimingUse these codes to reset the counting condition of the total counter, according to a change in billing conditions.

CautionThe values set for these codes affect the following counters and PM support related counters (other than feeding). “Definition setting of large size paper (PM) (08-347)” is set to the default, for the time to perform the PM. If the setting is reset, the PM will be necessary before the counters reach PM counts.• Printing counter (by paper size) (08-305 to 308)• Printing counter (by large/small size) (08-320 to 323)• Scan counter (by large/small size) (08-327 to 329)• FAX counter (by large/small size) (08-330/332)• Display of total number of pages (08-335)• Key copy counter• Coin controller• Copy Key Card

Code Applied to08-347 Definition setting of large size paper (PM)08-353 Definition setting of large size paper (Fee charging system counter)

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 52

Page 127: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-348/349

Definition Setting of Thick Paper / Transparency Film (PM)

PurposeThese codes are used to specify whether or not to increment the PM (Preventive Maintenance) related life counters by 2, every time a copy or printout is made on transparency film (in transparency film mode) or thick paper (in thick paper 1 or 2 mode).

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:

DescriptionWhen these codes are used, whether or not to increment the counters by 2 is specified, every time a copy or printout is made on transparency film or thick paper.

0: Increment the counter by 11: Increment the counter by 2* Default: 1

Setting TimingUse these codes to reset the counting condition of the life counters, when transparency film, thick paper 1 or thick paper 2 is used.

Caution• The values set for these codes affect the PM support related counters (other than feeding).• These codes are set to the default, for the time to perform the PM. If the setting is reset, the PM will

be necessary before the counters reach PM counts.

Code Applied to08-348 Count setting of thick paper (PM)08-349 Count setting of transparency film (PM)

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 53

Page 128: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-352

Count Setting of Large Size Paper (Fee Charging System Counter)

PurposeThis code is used to specify whether or not to increment the counters by 2, which are involved in billing such as the total counter and key copy counter, every time a copy or printout is made on large size paper including a large size envelope.* The paper counted as large size paper is specified in accordance with "Definition setting of large

size paper (Fee charging system counter) (08-353)."

DescriptionWhen this code is used, whether or not to increment the counters by 2 is specified, every time a copy or printout is made on large size paper.

0: Increment the counter by 11: Increment the counter by 2* Default: JPN: 0, Others: 1

Setting TimingUse this code to reset the counting condition of the total counter, according to a change in billing condi-tions.

CautionA value set for this code affects the following counters:• Printing counter (By paper size) (08-305 to 308)• Printing counter (By large/small size) (08-320 to 323)• Scan counter (By large/small size) (08-327 to 329)• FAX counter (By large/small size) (08-330/332)• Display of total number of pages (08-335)• Key copy counter• Coin controller• Copy key card

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 54

Page 129: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-356 to 358/360/370/372/374/1411

Drawer Counter Display

* Codes 08-360, 370 and 372 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

PurposeThe drawer counters are intended to accumulate copy counts fed from the drawers. These codes are used to display and check the current values of the drawer counters.

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:

DescriptionWhen these codes are used, the current values of the drawer counters are shown up to an 8-digit numeric value.

0 to 99999999 (copy counts)* Default: 0

Counting conditions are as follows.• Drawer counter:The counter is incremented by 1, every time a sheet of paper is copied or printed,

regardless of the paper size.

Setting TimingUse this code to check copy counts fed from the drawers, as a guide for replacing the drawer related PM parts (such as the pick-up roller).

CautionThe drawer counter values are stored on the SRAM board. If the SRAM board is replaced, refer to the data list in 08 SETTING code, use these codes to enter the current values, and restore the counters to the state before the replacement of the SRAM board.

Code Applied to08-356 Counter display for the drawer08-357 Counter display for the PFU drawer08-358 Counter display for the bypass tray (other than envelope)08-360 Counter display for the PFP upper drawer08-370 Counter display for the PFP lower drawer08-372 Counter display for the ADU08-374 Counter display for the ADF/RADF08-1411 Counter display for the bypass tray (envelope)

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 55

Page 130: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-361/1150/1158/1172/1174/1182/1198/1200/1214/1224/1246/1250/1268/1298/1300/1312/1314/1316/1320/1322/1328/1330/1332/1336

PM Management Setting

* Codes 08-1312/1314/1320/1322/1328/1330 are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

PurposeThese codes are used to display each copy counts, each driving time and replacement counts regard-ing the target PM replacement parts.Remember to clear the codes of the parts replaced after replacing them.

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:

[08-1150: Drum]

Note: Note: Only code 08-1150 is shown in the above table. Refer to the following pages for other codes and default values. The descriptions of "Description", "Setting Timing" and "Caution", are the same as for code 08-1150. Therefore, they are omitted.

DescriptionPerform the following settings regarding the target PM parts.• Sub code 0: This sub code is used to display the copy counts accumulated up to present.• Sub code 1: This sub code is used to specify the recommended copy counts for replacement.• Sub code 3: This sub code is used to display the driving counts accumulated up to present.• Sub code 4: This sub code is used to specify the recommended driving counts for replacement.• Sub code 6: This sub code is used to display the copy counts for control accumulated up to

present.• Sub code 7: This sub code is used to display the driving counts for control accumulated up to

present.

Sub codes 0, 3, 6, 7:0: Clears the counter1 to 99999999 (copy or time counts (1 count = 2 seconds))* Default: 0

Sub codes 1, 4:1 to 99999999 (copy or time counts (1 count = 2 seconds))* Default: Refer to the table.

Code Sub code Applied to Default08-1150 0 Present copy counts 0

1 Recommended copy counts for replacement e-STUDIO163: 72,000e-STUDIO203: 90,000e-STUDIO165: 72,000e-STUDIO205: 90,000

3 Present driving counts 04 Recommended driving counts for replace-

ment180,000

6 Present copy counts for control 07 Present driving counts for control 0

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 56

Page 131: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

Setting TimingUse these codes to display/reset each copy counts, each driving time and replacement counts regard-ing the target PM replacement parts.

Caution• The values for sub codes 0 and 6, 3 and 7 are the same.• When a value for sub code 0 is updated, the same value is updated for sub code 6. When a value

for sub code 3 is reset, the same value is updated for sub code 7 is updated. Likewise, when a value for sub code 6 is updated, the same value is updated for sub code 0. When a value for sub code 7 is reset, the same value is updated for sub code 3.

• When "0" is set for either of sub codes 0, 3, 6, and 7, "0" is updated for all sub codes 0, 3, 6, and 7.

[08-1158: Drum cleaning blade][08-1172: Drum separation finger][08-1174: Main charger grid][08-1182: Needle electrode][08-1200: Developer material][08-1214: Transfer charger wire][08-1224: Separation charger wire][08-1336: Recovery blade]

* The counter for code 08-1200 is automatically cleared and replacement counts are automatically counted up after "Automatic adjustment of auto-toner sensor (05-200)" is performed.

[08-1198: Ozone filter][08-361: Upper fuser roller bushing][08-1246: Fuser roller][08-1250: Pressure roller][08-1268: Fuser roller separation finger]

Code Sub code Applied to Default08-115808-117208-117408-118208-120008-121408-122408-1336

0 Present copy counts 01 Recommended copy counts for replacement e-STUDIO163: 72,000

e-STUDIO203: 90,000e-STUDIO165: 72,000e-STUDIO205: 90,000

3 Present driving counts 04 Recommended driving counts for replacement 180,0006 Present copy counts for control 07 Present driving counts for control 0

Code Sub code Applied to Default08-36108-119808-124608-125008-1268

0 Present copy counts 01 Recommended copy counts for replacement e-STUDIO163: 72,000

e-STUDIO203: 90,000e-STUDIO165: 72,000e-STUDIO205: 90,000

3 Present driving counts 04 Recommended driving counts for replacement 180,0006 Present copy counts for control 07 Present driving counts for control 0

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 57

Page 132: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

[08-1298: Feed roller (Drawer)][08-1300: Feed roller (PFU drawer)][08-1312: Separation roller (PFP upper drawer)][08-1314: Separation roller (PFP lower drawer)][08-1316: Separation roller (bypass tray)][08-1320: Feed roller (PFP upper drawer)][08-1322: Feed roller (PFP lower drawer)][08-1328: Pickup roller (PFP upper drawer)][08-1330: Pickup roller (PFP lower drawer)][08-1332: Pickup roller (bypass tray)]

Code Sub code Applied to Default08-129808-130008-131208-131408-131608-132008-132208-132808-133008-1332

0 Present copy counts 01 Recommended copy counts for replacement 80,000

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 58

Page 133: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-381

External Counter Function

PurposeThis code is used to count the number of copies in each operation mode of the equipment, when the external counter is used. (The counter set for "Externally installed copy counter / Controller device (08-202)" is used as the external counter.)Only the number of copies is counted by default when the copy function is used. However, when the setting is changed, the numbers of copies are counted when the Fax and printer functions are used.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, the counting target operation mode is reset.

0: Not selected (Does not count)1: Copier2: Fax3: Copier/Fax4: Printer5: Copier/Printer6: Printer/Fax7: Copier/Printer/Fax* Default: 1

Setting TimingAt the request of a user, use this code to reset the counting target operation mode of the external counter.

CautionWhen this code is used to count the number of copies at the external counter, unless the external counter is connected, the operation mode specified cannot be used.

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 59

Page 134: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-388/389

Copying Total Counter

PurposeThe total counter shows important values to operate this equipment (to calculate billing amounts). In case of any trouble, counter values are written into memory on the MAIN board and SRAM board in parallel, to avoid losing these values. These codes are used to alternatively copy counter values on the boards.

DescriptionWhen these codes are used, counter values are copied in the direction specified by codes entered.

08-388:This code is used to copy counter values on the MAIN board onto the SRAM board.08-389:This code is used to copy counter values on the SRAM board onto the MAIN board.

Setting TimingUse these codes to copy counter values onto the board where the counter values have been replaced, after replacing the MAIN board or SRAM board.

Caution• Remember to record the current counter values before copying counter values.• Never confuse the copying direction to copy counter values on the replaced board.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 60

Page 135: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-400

Fuser Unit Error Status Counter

PurposeWhen a fuser unit related error (error code C41, C43, C44 or C45) occurs, the set value of the fuser sta-tus counter varies, depending on type of error.Displaying and checking the set value of the fuser status counter can analyze a cause for the error. If any of "2 to 9" is set at the fuser status counter, the fuser unit will not be operated for safety reasons. After the fuser unit related error is resolved, if "0" is set, the fuser unit will be operated as usual. If any of "10 to 19" is set at the fuser status counter, the fuser unit will be operated as usual, even if "0" is not set after the fuser unit related error is resolved.

C41: Thermistor or heater abnormality at power-ONC43: Thermistor abnormality after abnormality judgmentC44: Heater abnormality after abnormality judgmentC45: Thermistor abnormality during printingC46 to C49: Reserved

DescriptionWhen this code is used, the current set value of the fuser status counter is displayed. Only "0" can be manually entered, in order to restore the fuser unit to its normal operation, after the fuser unit related error is resolved.For further reason why the counter value differs despite the same error code, refer to 5.1.7 or 5.1.8 [Fuser unit related service call] in the Service Handbook.

0: No error 10: C47 (Reserved)1: C41 (Once) 11: C47 (Reserved)2: C41 (Consecutively occurs) 12: C48 (Reserved)3: C46 (Reserved) 13: C49 (Reserved)4: C43 14: C47 (Reserved)5: C44 15: C48 (Reserved)6: C45 16: C49 (Reserved)7: C44 17: C47 (Reserved)8: C45 18: C48 (Reserved)9: C44 19: C49 (Reserved)* Default: 0

Setting TimingUse this code to resolve the fuser unit related error (error code C41, C43, C44 or C45). Resolve the error, and set "0" (or reset the counter), in order to restore the fuser unit to its normal operation.

CautionRemember to resolve the fuser unit related error, and then reset to "0."

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 61

Page 136: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-404/405

Temperature Drop Setting in Ready State

PurposeThese codes are used to set the drop temperature to control the temperature drop of the fuser unit in the ready state. When the temperature drops, the temperature of the fuser unit is reduced, allowing each thermistor to detect a difference in the specified temperature. When these codes are used to reset the drop temperature of the fuser unit, inconsistent fusing is avoided.

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:

DescriptionWhen these codes are used, the drop temperature in the ready state is reset.* The set value is valid only if “20” is set for “Temperature drop control setting in ready state (08-886).”

Set value x -5 °C = Drop temperature in the ready state

0: No temperature drop in the ready state1 to 10: Temperature drop in the ready state (-5 to -50 °C)* Default: 08-404: 1, 08-405: 3

* Set value in the case of inconsistent fusing:08-404-0 to 3: 1, 08-405-0 to 3: 1

Setting TimingUse these codes, if inconsistent fusing occurs when printing is performed after an extended period of time in the ready state.

Caution• If inconsistent fusing occurs, reset the set value for code 08-886 and then adjust this code.• If the set value is reset, offset failure is more likely to occur in the fuser roller. Therefore, carefully

perform the setting.• Make sure that there is no problem with the fuser unit or the equipment, and then reset the set

value.

Code Sub code Applied to08-404 0 Center thermistor detection temperature during the 1st drop

1 Center thermistor detection temperature during the 2nd drop2 Center thermistor detection temperature during the 3rd drop3 Center thermistor detection temperature during the 4th drop

08-405 0 Side thermistor detection temperature during the 1st drop1 Side thermistor detection temperature during the 2nd drop2 Side thermistor detection temperature during the 3rd drop3 Side thermistor detection temperature during the 4th drop

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 62

Page 137: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-407/411

Fuser Roller Temperature in Ready State

PurposeThese codes are used to set the temperature of the fuser roller in the ready state. (The temperature is detected by the center thermistor and the side thermistor of the fuser unit. The temperature can be indi-vidually specified.)As the lower temperature is set, more power consumption is reduced in the ready state. If the tempera-ture of the fuser roller is too low, stable and consistent fusing may not be provided at the start of print-ing.

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:

DescriptionWhen these codes are used, the temperature of the fuser roller in the ready state is reset.

0: 140 °C 4: 160 °C 8: 180 °C 12: 200 °C1: 145 °C 5: 165 °C 9: 185 °C2: 150 °C 6: 170 °C 10: 190 °C3: 155 °C 7: 175 °C 11: 195 °C* Default: 6

Setting TimingUse these codes to set the lower temperature, in order to reduce power consumption. Note that incon-sistent fusing may occur if the lower temperature is set.

CautionUse the above default value, unless otherwise required.

Code Applied to08-407 Temperature of the fuser roller in ready state (Side thermistor)08-411 Temperature of the fuser roller in ready state (Center thermistor)

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 63

Page 138: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-409/448

Fuser Roller Temperature in Energy Saver Mode

PurposeThese codes are used to set the temperature of the fuser roller when the equipment switches to energy saver mode. The temperature is detected by the center thermistor and the side thermistor of the fuser unit. The temperatures can be individually specified.

As the lower temperature is set, more power consumption is reduced in energy saver mode, but an extended period of time is required to start printing. On the contrary, as the higher temperature is set, more power consumption is necessary, but a less period of time is required to start printing.

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:

DescriptionWhen these codes are used, the temperature of the fuser roller in energy saver mode is reset.

0: OFF 4: 70 °C 8: 110 °C 12: 150 °C1: 40 °C 5: 80 °C 9: 120 °C 13: 160 °C2: 50 °C 6: 90 °C 10: 130 °C3: 60 °C 7: 100 °C 11: 140 °C* Default: 0

Setting TimingUse these codes to set the higher temperature, if an extended period of time is required to start printing by default.In this case, notify users that more power consumption is necessary.

CautionUse the above default value, unless otherwise required.

Code Applied to08-409 Temperature of the fuser roller in energy saver mode (Side thermistor)08-448 Temperature of the fuser roller in energy saver mode (Center thermistor)

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 64

Page 139: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-410/413/437/438/450 to 453/520/521

Fuser Roller Temperature during Printing (by Paper Type)

PurposeThese codes are used to set the temperature of the fuser roller during the print operation, to provide stable and consistent fusing. A temperature is detected by the center thermistor and the side thermistor of the fuser unit. The temperatures can be individually specified.

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:

DescriptionWhen these codes are used, the temperature of the fuser roller is reset by paper type and temperature control thermistor.

0: 140 °C 5: 165 °C 10: 190 °C1: 145 °C 6: 170 °C 11: 195 °C2: 150 °C 7: 175 °C 12: 200 °C3: 155 °C 8: 180 °C 13: 205 °C160 °C 9: 185 °C 14: 210 °C* Default:

08-410/413: 6, 08-437: 9, 08-438: 6, 08-450/451: 6, 08-452: 9, 08-453: 6, 08-520/521: 9

Setting TimingIn the case of inconsistent fusing, use these codes to set a larger value if the fusing temperature seems low, and set a smaller value if the fusing temperature seems high.

Caution• Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.• Make sure that there is no problem with the fuser unit or the equipment, and then reset the set

value.

Code Applied to08-410 Plain paper mode (Center thermistor)08-413 Thick paper 1 mode (Center thermistor)08-437 Thick paper 2 mode (Center thermistor)08-438 Transparency film mode (Center thermistor)08-450 Plain paper mode (Side thermistor)08-451 Thick paper 1 mode (Side thermistor)08-452 Thick paper 2 mode (Side thermistor)08-453 Transparency film mode (Side thermistor)08-520 Envelope mode (Center thermistor)08-521 Envelope mode (Side thermistor)

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 65

Page 140: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-414

Toner Density Correction Switching

PurposeThe auto-toner sensor is used to detect the toner density, and toner-supply operation is performed to maintain a constant toner density. When this code is used, the threshold value to supply toner and the toner density in the developer material vary.A problem such as insufficient image density is more likely to occur when the developer material reaches almost the end of its life, thus, this correction gradually increases the correction amount, depending on the life of the developer material.

DescriptionThe relationship of the set value and the toner density is as follows:

Life: approx.30,000 pages Life: approx.60,000 pages Life: approx.90,000 pages0: Does not correct 0: Does not correct 0: Does not correct1: -1 bit (approx. -0.2 wt%) 1: Does not correct 1: Does not correct 2: +1 bit (approx. +0.2 wt%) 2: +1 bit (approx. +0.2 wt%) 2: +1 bit (approx. +0.2 wt%)3: +1 bit (approx. +0.2 wt%) 3: +2 bit (approx. +0.5wt%) 3: +2 bit (approx. -0.5 wt%)4: -1 bit (approx. -0.2 wt%) 4: -1 bit (approx. -0.2 wt%) 4: -1 bit (approx. -0.2 wt%)5: -2 bit (approx. -0.4 wt%) 5: -1 bit (approx. -0.2 wt%) 5: -2 bit (approx. -0.4 wt%)6: -2 bit (approx. -0.4 wt%) 6: -2 bit (approx. -0.4 wt%) 6: -4 bit (approx. -0.8 wt%)7: -3 bit (approx. -0.6wt%) 7: -4 bit (approx. -0.8 wt%) 7: -5 bit (approx. - 1.0 wt%)* Default: 0

Setting TimingUse this code, if the printing density is extremely high or low.

Caution• Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.• If the toner density in the developer material is too low, the printing density becomes low. The carrier

adheres to the drum and a scratch may occur on the drum.• If the toner density in the developer material is too high, a problem such as toner scattering may

occur. In addition, toner consumption is increased.• Note that the image is not immediately affected even if the set value is reset. (The toner density in

the developer material will not become higher or lower until a certain amount of print operation is performed.)

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 66

Page 141: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-424/425

Temperature Drop Switching Time Setting in Ready State

PurposeThese codes are used to set the drop temperature timing to control the temperature drop of the fuser unit in the ready state. When the temperature drops, the temperature of the fuser unit is reduced, every time the specified temperature passes. In this case, the temperature of the fuser unit is reduced, allow-ing each thermistor to detect a difference in the temperature set for 08-404/405. When these codes are used to reset the drop temperature timing of the fuser unit, inconsistent fusing is avoided.

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:

DescriptionWhen these codes are used, the switching time to control the temperature drop in the ready state is reset.* The set value is valid only if “20” is set for “Temperature drop control setting in ready state (08-886).”

Set value x 1 minute = Switching time to control the temperature drop in the ready state2 to 60: Temperature drop in the ready state (2 to 60 minutes later)* Default: 5 (15 minutes later)

Setting TimingUse these codes, if inconsistent fusing occurs when printing is performed after an extended period of time in the ready state.

Caution• If inconsistent fusing occurs, reset the set value for code 08-886 and then adjust this code.• If the set value is reset, offset failure is more likely to occur in the fuser roller. Therefore, carefully

perform the setting.• Make sure that there is no problem with the fuser unit or the equipment, and then reset the set

value.

Code Sub code Applied to08-424 0 Switching time during the 1st drop (Center thermistor)

1 Switching time during the 2nd drop (Center thermistor)2 Switching time during the 3rd drop (Center thermistor)3 Switching time during the 4th drop (Center thermistor)

08-425 0 Switching time during the 1st drop (Side thermistor)1 Switching time during the 2nd drop (Side thermistor)2 Switching time during the 3rd drop (Side thermistor)3 Switching time during the 4th drop (Side thermistor)

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 67

Page 142: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-433/800/801/802/804/896

Temperature Control Lower Limit

PurposeThese codes are used to set the lower limit of the drop temperature to control the temperature drop of the fuser unit. When these codes are used to reset the lower limit of the drop temperature of the fuser unit, inconsistent fusing is avoided.

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:

DescriptionWhen these codes are used, the lower limit of the drop temperature to control the temperature drop is reset.

0: 130 °C 5: 155 °C 10: 180 °C1: 135 °C 6: 160 °C 11: 185 °C2: 140 °C 7: 165 °C 12: 120 °C3: 145 °C 8: 170 °C4: 150 °C 9: 175 °C* Default:

08-433-0: 5, 08-433-1: 3, 08-800-0: 7, 08-800-1: 5, 08-801-0: 7, 08-801-1:508-802-0/1: 11, 08-804-0/1: 11, 08-896-0: 5, 08-896-1: 3

Setting TimingUse these codes, if inconsistent fusing occurs when continuous printing is performed in large quanti-ties.

Caution• If inconsistent fusing occurs, reset the set value for code 08-535 and then adjust this code.• Make sure that there is no problem with the fuser unit or the equipment, and then reset the set

value.

Code Sub code Applied to08-433 0 Plain paper mode at room temperature (Center thermistor)

1 Plain paper mode at room temperature (Side thermistor)08-800 0 Transparency film mode (Center thermistor)

1 Transparency film mode (Side thermistor)08-801 0 Thick paper 1 mode (Center thermistor)

1 Thick paper 1 mode (Side thermistor)08-802 0 Thick paper 2 mode (Center thermistor)

1 Thick paper 2 mode (Side thermistor)08-804 0 Envelope mode (Center thermistor)

1 Envelope mode (Side thermistor)08-896 0 Plain paper mode at low temperature (Center thermistor)

1 Plain paper mode at low temperature (Side thermistor)

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 68

Page 143: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-439 to 441/523/526

Pre-Running Time for First Printing (by Paper Type)

PurposeThese codes are used to set a period of time required to print the first page (a pre-running time) by paper type, in order to provide stable and consistent fusing when the first page is printed.It is necessary to set a pre-running time and increase the temperature of the fuser roller, to provide sta-ble and consistent fusing when the first page is printed.An extended period of time is set by default to give priority to the image quality. However, a shorter period of time can be set for users who do not desire to set an extended period of time required to print the first page.

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:

DescriptionWhen these codes are used, a pre-running time required to print the first page is reset by paper type.

0: Invalid 4: 4 sec. 8: 8 sec. 12: 14 sec.1: 1 sec. 5: 5 sec. 9: 9 sec. 13: 16 sec.2: 2 sec. 6: 6 sec. 10: 10 sec. 14: 18 sec.3: 3 sec. 7: 7 sec. 11: 12 sec. 15: 20 sec.* Default: 08-439: 10, 08-440: 0, 08-441: 10, 08-523: 10, 08-526: 0

Setting TimingUse these codes to set a smaller value (shorter time) in order to reduce a pre-running time required to print the first page.If the smaller value is set (shorter time), inconsistent fusing is more likely to occur.

CautionUse the above default value, unless otherwise required.

Code Applied to08-439 Thick paper 2 mode08-440 Plain paper mode08-441 Thick paper 1 mode08-523 Envelope mode08-526 Transparency film mode

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 69

Page 144: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-455

Toner Supply Amount Correction

PurposeWhen the toner motor is rotated, toner is supplied to the developer. This code is used to correct the toner motor rotation period when toner is supplied, and the amount of toner supplied at one time.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, the toner motor rotation period is reset when toner is supplied.

0: 100%1: 75%2: 50%3: 30%4: 200%5: 150%* Default: 0

Setting Timing• Use this code to reduce the toner motor rotation period and the amount of toner supplied at a time,

when toner is supplied.• Use this code to increase the toner motor rotation period and the amount of toner supplied at a time.

CautionUse the above default value, unless otherwise required.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 70

Page 145: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-462

Setting for Switchback Operation to Copy Mixed-Sized Original on RADF (A/B Format)

* This code is valid only when the RADF (Reversing Automatic Document Feeder) is installed.

PurposeWhen an original with A4-R or FOLIO width (both 210 mm in width) is copied in mixed-sized original mode, either A4-R or FOLIO cannot be identified by their original widths, because they are the same. Therefore, detect their original lengths, in order to identify A4-R and FOLIO.The table below shows the combination of the switchback (transporting without scanning in reverse) setting status and the paper selection mode (APS/AMS) when an original with A4-R/FOLIO width is copied. As this table explains, since the "transporting without scanning in reverse" function does not apply in the default setting ("Invalid"), FOLIO is detected as A4-R when the AMS (Automatic Magnifica-tion Selection) is selected, and paper is fed from the A4-sized drawer. In other combinations, an A4-R/FOLIO-sized original is detected properly regardless of the selection status of the "transporting without scanning in reverse" function.In other words, it is necessary to enable the ”transporting without scanning in reverse” function, in order to detect a FOLIO-sized original properly, when the AMS is selected.

[Paper size: A4-R/FOLIO]

* For the equipment destined for regions, where the LT-format original is applied, whenever LT-R/LG width is detected, an original is transported without scanning in reverse when the AMS is selected, regardless of the value set for this code.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, whether or not to transport A4-R/FOLIO-sized originals without scanning in reverse is reset, when these mixed originals are placed on the ADF/RADF when the AMS is selected.

0: Invalid (Does not transport in reverse without scanning)1: Valid (When the AMS is selected, the original length is detected by transporting without scanning in reverse, and FOLIO is identified properly)* Default: 0

Setting TimingAt the request of a user, use this code to distinguish A4-R and FOLIO in mixed-sized original mode when the AMS is selected.

Paper selection Transporting without scanning in reverse / size detection "0" (Invalid) "1" (Valid)

APS(Automatic Paper Selection)

Transporting without scanning in reverse

Not performed Not performed

Size selection A4-R --> A4-RFOLIO --> FOLIO

A4-R --> A4-RFOLIO --> FOLIO

AMS(Automatic Magnifica-tion Selection)

Transporting without scanning in reverse

Not performed Not performed

Size selection A4-R --> A4-RFOLIO --> A4-R

A4-R --> A4-RFOLIO --> FOLIO

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 71

Page 146: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

Caution• This code is valid only for the equipment destined for regions, where the A/B-format original is

applied.• If "1" (Valid) is set, and, even when only A4-R-size originals are placed in mixed-sized original mode

when the AMS is selected, these originals are transported in reverse without scanning. As a result, the original scanning speed is reduced.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 72

Page 147: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-463

Light Control Status

PurposeAfter performing “Forced performing of peak detection (05-310)” is performed, this code is used to dis-play the end status and check the status of the exposure light source.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, the result on forced performing of peak detection is displayed.

0: Normal end1: G-LED white level abnormality2: G-LED peak detection abnormality3: R-LED adjustment impossible4: B-LED adjustment impossible5: YG-LED adjustment impossible6: White level abnormality7: Black level abnormality* Normal operation: 0, in the case of an error: 1 to 7

Setting TimingUse this code to check the details of the error, if an error occurs when forced performing of peak detec-tion is executed

CautionWhen an error occurs (“0” to “7” is set), a service call appears. Therefore, replace the CIS unit.

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 73

Page 148: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-476/536/537/539

Temperature Drop Setting during Printing

PurposeThese codes are used to set the drop temperature to control the temperature drop of the fuser unit when the printer function is used to print. When the temperature drops, the temperature of the fuser unit is reduced, allowing each thermistor to detect a difference in the specified temperature. When these codes are used to reset the drop temperature of the fuser unit, inconsistent fusing is avoided.

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:

DescriptionWhen these codes are used, the drop temperature is reset when the printer function is used to print.* The set value is valid only if “20” is set for “Temperature drop control setting during printing (08-

535).”

Set value x -5 °C = Drop temperature during the print operation

0: No temperature drop during the print operation1 to 10: Temperature drop during the print operation (-5 to – 50 °C)

* Default value:08-476-0: 1, 08-476-1: 1, 08-476-2: 1, 08-476-3: 108-536-0: 1, 08-536-1: 2, 08-536-2: 3, 08-536-3: 308-537-0: 1, 08-537-1: 2, 08-537-2: 3, 08-537-3: 508-539-0: 1, 08-539-1: 2, 08-539-2: 3, 08-539-3: 3

* Set value in the case of inconsistent fusing:08-476-0: 0, 08-476-1: 0, 08-476-2: 1, 08-476-3: 108-536-0: 0, 08-536-1: 0, 08-536-2: 1, 08-536-3: 108-537-0: 0, 08-537-1: 0, 08-537-2: 0, 08-537-3: 108-539-0: 0, 08-539-1: 0, 08-539-2: 1, 08-539-3: 1

Code Sub code Applied to08-476 0 Thick paper mode, center thermistor detection temperature during the 1st drop

1 Thick paper mode, center thermistor detection temperature during the 2nd drop2 Thick paper mode, center thermistor detection temperature during the 3rd drop3 Thick paper mode, center thermistor detection temperature during the 4th drop

08-536 0 Plain paper mode, center thermistor detection temperature during the 1st drop1 Plain paper mode, center thermistor detection temperature during the 2nd drop2 Plain paper mode, center thermistor detection temperature during the 3rd drop3 Plain paper mode, center thermistor detection temperature during the 4th drop

08-537 0 Plain paper mode, side thermistor detection temperature during the 1st drop1 Plain paper mode, side thermistor detection temperature during the 2nd drop2 Plain paper mode, side thermistor detection temperature during the 3rd drop3 Plain paper mode, side thermistor detection temperature during the 4th drop

08-539 0 Thick paper mode, side thermistor detection temperature during the 1st drop1 Thick paper mode, side thermistor detection temperature during the 2nd drop2 Thick paper mode, side thermistor detection temperature during the 3rd drop3 Thick paper mode, side thermistor detection temperature during the 4th drop

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 74

Page 149: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

Setting TimingUse these codes, if inconsistent fusing occurs when the printer function is used and continuous printing is performed in large quantities of plain paper and thick paper.

Caution• If inconsistent fusing occurs, reset the set value for code 08-535 and then adjust this code.• If the set value is reset, offset failure is more likely to occur in the fuser roller. Therefore, carefully

perform the setting.• Make sure that there is no problem with the fuser unit or the equipment, and then reset the set

value.

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 75

Page 150: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-480

Default Setting of Paper Source

PurposeThis code is used to specify the paper source option, which is selected by priority, when the copy and Fax reception functions are used to print. This set value is applied as the paper source, which is selected by default when the [COPY] or [APS/AMS] button is pressed, and as the paper source, which is used by priority when the copy and Fax reception functions are used to print and the automatic paper source selection function is used to feed.* APS (Automatic Paper Selection): It is intended to start printing while automatically detecting the

size of an original and selecting a drawer where the detected size of paper is loaded.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, the paper source option by priority is reset.

0: Paper source where A4 or LT-size paper is loaded1: Drawer2: PFU drawer3: PFP upper drawer4: PFP lower drawer* Default: 0

Setting TimingAt the request of a user, use this code to specify the paper source option, which is used by priority.* For instance, if A4-size bond paper and recycled paper are loaded in the separate drawers, use this

code to select a drawer where recycled paper is loaded by priority.

CautionThe set value is applied only when the copy and Fax reception functions are used to print.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 76

Page 151: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-481

Automatic Paper Source Selection

PurposeThe automatic paper source change function is intended to switch to another paper source, where the same sized paper is loaded, if the selected paper source has run out of paper during the copy opera-tion. This code is used to specify whether or not to enable the automatic paper source change function.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, whether or not to enable the automatic paper source change function is reset during the copy operation.

0: Enables1: Disables* Default: 1

Setting TimingAt the request of a user, use this code to disable the automatic paper source change function.

CautionThe set value is applied only when the copy function is used.

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 77

Page 152: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-482

Feeding Retry

PurposeIt is hard to feed thick paper or transparency film, compared to plain paper. The equipment automati-cally retries to feed such hard-to-feed paper, in order to thoroughly feed it after it fails to feed. This code is used to specify whether or not to enable paper feed retry.* When this code is used to enable paper feed retry, up to five retries are performed.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, whether or not to enable paper feed retry is reset.

0: Enables1: Disables* Default: 1

Setting TimingUse this code to specify whether or not to enable paper feed retry.

CautionThe number of retries cannot be reset. (Five retries are fixed.)

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 78

Page 153: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-483

Pre-Running Rotation of Polygonal Motor

PurposeThis code is used to specify whether or not to switch the polygonal motor from its standby rotation (low speed rotation) to its normal rotation (high speed rotation during the scan operation), when an original is placed on the ADF/RADF or the platen cover is opened.* If the polygonal motor switches to its normal rotation when the original is placed on the ADF/RADF

or the platen cover is opened, but the equipment does not start the operation to scan originals within a certain period of time, the polygonal motor goes back to its standby rotation. The period of time until it goes back to its standby rotation is set in "Timing of auto-cleaning of polygonal motor pre-run-ning rotation (08-486)."

DescriptionWhen this code is used, the switching condition of the polygonal motor from its standby rotation to its normal rotation is reset.

0: Valid (when the original is placed on the RADF or the platen cover is opened)1: Invalid2: Valid (only when the original is placed on the ADF/RADF)* Default: 0

Setting TimingUse this code to switch the polygonal motor rotation state between its standby rotation and its normal rotation, if the original is placed on the ADF/RADF or the platen cover is opened.

CautionUse the above default value, unless otherwise required.

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 79

Page 154: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-486

Timing of Auto-Clearing of Polygonal Motor Pre-Running Rotation

PurposeWhen the equipment does not perform the operation to scan originals for a certain period of time after the polygonal motor starts pre-running, the polygonal motor switches back from its normal rotation (high speed rotation during the scan operation) to its standby rotation (low speed rotation). This code is used to specify the period of time until it goes back to its standby rotation.* Polygonal motor pre-running is the function to switch the polygonal motor rotation from its standby

rotation to its normal rotation when an original is placed on the ADF/RADF or the platen cover is opened. This code is valid if "0" (default) or "2" is set for "Pre-running rotation of polygonal motor (08-483)."

DescriptionWhen this code is used, the period of time until the polygonal motor switches from its normal rotation to its standby rotation is reset.

0: 15 sec1: 30 sec2: 45 sec* Default: 0

Setting TimingUse this code to reset the period of time required to switch the polygonal motor from its normal rotation to its standby rotation when the equipment does not perform any operation for a certain period of time.

CautionUse the above default value, unless otherwise required.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 80

Page 155: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-502

Error Diffusion and Dither Setting at Photo Mode

PurposeThis code is used to switch the image processing method, with "Photo" selected from among the origi-nal mode options, during the copy operation.Both the error diffusion and dither methods are intended to generate grayscale images using white and black pixels. But they have different principles.The dither method determines whether the dot is black or white on a dot-by-dot basis, in accordance with a particular rule, in response to a gradation of image pixels scanned in Photo mode, and repre-sents grayscale images based on the ratio of black to white dots. On the other hand, the error diffusion method performs processing, depending on the target and surrounding pixels instead of on a dot-by-dot basis. It has an advantage of correcting irregularities of the target pixels by checking the surrounding ones.The dither method is used by default.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, the image processing method is reset in Photo mode during the copy opera-tion.

0: Error diffusion1: Dither* Default: 1

Setting TimingUse this code to switch the image processing method in Photo mode during the copy operation.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 81

Page 156: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-510

Automatic FAX Transmission

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* This code is valid only when the Fax Kit is installed.

PurposeThis code is used to specify whether or not to automatically start scanning and transmit (automatically) an original placed on the equipment, when one-touch keys are used or the [SPEED DIAL] button is pressed during the fax transmission.In addition, this code is used to start fax transmission when one-touch keys are used or the [SPEED DIAL] button is pressed, and also the [START] button is pressed, in order to prevent improper transmis-sion by users and protect security.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, whether or not to use the automatic fax transmission function is reset.

0: Automatic transmission enabled(Use one-touch keys or press or the [SPEED DIAL] button to transmit a fax.)

1: Automatic transmission disabled(Use one-touch keys or press the [SPEED DIAL] button, and also press the [START] button to transmit a fax.)

* Default: 0

Setting TimingAt the request of a user, use this code to reset automatic fax transmission.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 82

Page 157: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-515/516

Temperature Setting during Warming-up

PurposeThese codes are used to set the temperature of the fuser roller during warming-up. A temperature is detected by the center thermistor and the side thermistor of the fuser unit. The temperatures can be individually specified.As the lower temperature is set, more power consumption is reduced during warming-up. If the temper-ature of the fuser roller is too low, stable and consistent fusing may not be provided at the start of print-ing.

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:

DescriptionWhen these codes are used, the temperature of the fuser roller during warming-up is reset.

0: 140 °C 5: 165 °C 10: 190 °C1: 145 °C 6: 170 °C 11: 195 °C2: 150 °C 7: 175 °C 12: 200 °C3: 155 °C 8: 180 °C 13: 205 °C4: 160 °C 9: 185 °C 14: 210 °C* Default: 9

Setting TimingIn the case of inconsistent fusing, use these codes to set a larger value if the fusing temperature seems low, and set a smaller value if the fusing temperature seems high.

Caution• Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.• Make sure that there is no problem with the fuser unit or the equipment, and then reset the set

value.

Code Applied to08-515 Temperature setting during warming-up (Center thermistor)08-516 Temperature setting during warming-up (Side thermistor)

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 83

Page 158: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-525/527/540/541

Temperature Drop Switching Time Setting during Printing

PurposeThese codes are used to set the drop temperature timing to control the temperature drop of the fuser unit when the printer function is used to print. When the temperature drops, the temperature of the fuser unit is reduced, every time the specified temperature passes. In this case, the temperature of the fuser unit is reduced, allowing each thermistor to detect a difference in the temperature set for 08-476/536/537/539. When these codes are used to reset the drop temperature timing of the fuser unit, inconsistent fusing is avoided.

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:

DescriptionWhen these codes are used, the switching time to control the temperature drop is reset when the printer function is used to print.* The set value is valid only if “20” is set for “Temperature drop control setting during printing (08-

535).”

Set value x 5 seconds = Switching time to control the temperature drop during the print operation

0: No temperature drop during the print operation1 to 200: Temperature drop during the print operation (5 to 1,000 seconds later)* Default:

08-525-0: 20, 08-525-1: 38, 08-525-2: 75, 08-525-3: 7508-527-0: 20, 08-527-1: 30, 08-527-2: 48, 08-527-3: 7508-540-0: 20, 08-540-1: 48, 08-540-2: 100, 08-540-3: 10008-541-0: 20, 08-541-1: 48, 08-541-2: 100, 08-541-3: 100

Setting TimingUse these codes, if inconsistent fusing occurs when the printer function is used and continuous printing is performed in large quantities of plain paper and thick paper.

Code Sub code Applied to08-525 0 Plain paper mode, switching time during the 1st drop (Center thermistor)

1 Plain paper mode, switching time during the 2nd drop (Center thermistor)2 Plain paper mode, switching time during the 3rd drop (Center thermistor)3 Plain paper mode, switching time during the 4th drop (Center thermistor)

08-527 0 Plain paper mode, switching time during the 1st drop (Side thermistor)1 Plain paper mode, switching time during the 2nd drop (Side thermistor)2 Plain paper mode, switching time during the 3rd drop (Side thermistor)3 Plain paper mode, switching time during the 4th drop (Side thermistor)

08-540 0 Thick paper mode, switching time during the 1st drop (Center thermistor)1 Thick paper mode, switching time during the 2nd drop (Center thermistor)2 Thick paper mode, switching time during the 3rd drop (Center thermistor)3 Thick paper mode, switching time during the 4th drop (Center thermistor)

08-541 0 Thick paper mode, switching time during the 1st drop (Side thermistor)1 Thick paper mode, switching time during the 2nd drop (Side thermistor)2 Thick paper mode, switching time during the 3rd drop (Side thermistor)3 Thick paper mode, switching time during the 4th drop (Side thermistor)

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 84

Page 159: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

Caution• If inconsistent fusing occurs, reset the set value for code 08-535 and then adjust this code.• If the set value is reset, offset failure is more likely to occur in the fuser roller. Therefore, carefully

perform the setting.• Make sure that there is no problem with the fuser unit or the equipment, and then reset the set

value.

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 85

Page 160: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-535

Temperature Drop Control Setting during Printing (Temperature/Time)

PurposeThis code used to set the pattern to control the temperature drop when the printer function is used to print. In the control pattern, the drop temperature and drop timing to control the temperature drop are set, and a control pattern option is selected by paper type (plain paper, thick paper). When this code is used to reset the pattern to control the temperature drop of the fuser unit, inconsistent fusing is avoided.

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:

* Thick paper 1 and 2, transparency film and envelope are included in thick paper mode.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, the pattern to control the temperature drop (drop temperature, drop timing) is reset when the printer function is used to print.

0: No temperature drop control1 to 19: Patterns 1 to 1920: Temperature and timing selected optionally* Default: 08-535-0: 2, 08-535-1: 12

* Set value in the case of inconsistent fusing: 08-535-0: 7, 08-535-1: 17

* Patterns 1, 3 to 6, 8 to 11, 13 to 19: No need to use

Setting Timing• Set “7” for code 07-535-0, if inconsistent fusing occurs when continuous printing is performed in

large quantities of plain paper.• Set “17” for code 07-535-1, if inconsistent fusing occurs when continuous printing is performed in

large quantities of thick paper.• Set “20” in order to set the drop temperature and drop timing to control the temperature drop individ-

ually. Then, the set values for the following codes will be valid:

Temperature drop setting during printing (08-476/536/537/539)Temperature drop switching time setting during printing (08-525/527/540/541)

Caution• If the set value is reset, offset failure is more likely to occur in the fuser roller. Therefore, carefully

perform the setting.• Make sure that there is no problem with the fuser unit or the equipment, and then reset the set

value.

Code Sub code Applied to08-535 0 Plain paper mode

1 Thick paper mode

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 86

Page 161: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-538

Default Setting in Density Adjustment Mode (Copy Function)

PurposeThis code used to specify the density adjustment value, which is displayed as the default on the control panel and used by priority during the copy operation.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, the density adjustment mode, which is used by priority, is reset.

0: Auto density adjustment1: Manual density adjustment: Low density 3 (Light)2: Manual density adjustment: Low density 23: Manual density adjustment: Low density 14: Manual density adjustment 0 (Center)5: Manual density adjustment: High density 16: Manual density adjustment: High density 27: Manual density adjustment: High density 3 (Dark)* Default: 0

* On the e-STUDIO165/e-STUDIO205, the default in density adjustment mode is set according to the following operation:[USER FUNCTIONS] --> [DEFAULT SETTINGS] --> [COPY SETUP] --> [LIGHT/DARK]

Setting TimingAt the request of a user, use this code to switch the density adjustment mode, which is used by priority.

CautionThe set value is applied, if the [FUNCTION CLEAR] button is pressed when the equipment starts up and during the copy operation.

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 87

Page 162: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-550

Default Setting of Original Mode (Copy Function)

PurposeThis code is used to specify the original mode, which is displayed as the default on the control panel and used by priority during the copy operation.

DescriptionThis code is used to specify the original mode, which is displayed as the default on the control panel and used by priority during the copy operation.

When this code is used, the original mode, which is used by priority, is reset.0: Text/photo1: Photo2: Text* Default: 0

* On the e-STUDIO165/e-STUDIO205, the default in original mode is set according to the following operation:[USER FUNCTIONS] --> [DEFAULT SETTINGS] --> [COPY SETUP] --> [IMAGE MODE]

Setting TimingAt the request of a user, use this code to reset the original mode, which is used by priority.

CautionThe set value is applied, if the [FUNCTION CLEAR] button is pressed when the equipment starts up and during the copy operation.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 88

Page 163: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-603

Setting for Automatic Duplexing Mode (Copy Function)

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* This code is valid only when the RADF (Reversing Automatic Document Feeder) is installed.

PurposeThis code is to specify the copy mode ("Selection of original single-sided/two sided feeding" and "Selection of simplex/duplex copying"), which is displayed as the default on the control panel and used by priority, when an original is placed on the RADF.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, the copy mode, which is used by priority, is reset.

0: Single-sided feeding to simplex copying (one-sided originals --> one-sided copies)1: Single-sided feeding to duplex copying (one-sided originals --> two-sided copies)2: Double-sided feeding to duplex copying (two-sided originals --> two-sided copies)* Default: 0

Setting TimingAt the request of a user, use this code to reset the copy mode, which is used by priority.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 89

Page 164: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-604

APS/AMS Default Setting (Copy Function)

PurposeThis code is used to specify which function is displayed as the default on the control panel and used by priority, "APS (Automatic Paper Selection)" or "AMS (Automatic Magnification Selection)" during the copy operation.* APS: It is intended to start printing while automatically detecting the size of an original and selecting

a drawer where the detected size of paper is loaded.* AMS: It is intended to start printing while selecting a drawer where desired paper is loaded and auto-

matically computing a reproduction ratio to fit into the size of paper.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, the function, which is used by priority, is reset.

0: APS (Automatic Paper Selection)1: AMS (Automatic Magnification Selection)2: Not selected* Default: 0

Setting TimingAt the request of a user, use this code to reset the function, which is used by priority.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 90

Page 165: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-611

Book Type Original Priority (Copy Function)

PurposeThis code is used to specify the default which book-type original is selected as a reference, where odd-numbered pages are laid out on the right-hand side, with characters written horizontally, or where odd numbered pages are laid out on the left-hand side, with characters written vertically, in order to copy a book-type original in duplexing mode.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, the reference book-type original is reset.

0: Book-type original, where odd-numbered pages are laid out on the right-hand side(Copying starts from a left-hand page to a right-hand page.)

1: Book-type original, where odd-numbered pages are laid out on the left-hand side(Copying is performed from a right-hand page to a left-hand page.)

* Default: 0

<Book-type original, where odd-numbered pages are laid out on the right-hand side>

<Book-type original, where odd-numbered pages are laid out on the left-hand side>

Setting TimingAt the request of a user, use this code to reset the reference book-type original.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

1st sheet 2nd sheet 3rd sheetBook-type original, where odd-numbered pages are laid out on the right-hand side

1st sheet 2nd sheet 3rd sheetBook-type original, where odd-numbered pages are laid out on the left-hand side

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 91

Page 166: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-615

Size Information of Main Memory and Page Memory

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

PurposeThis code is used to display the sizes of main memory and page memory. It is used to check that the equipment recognizes each memory properly.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, the sizes of main memory and page memory are displayed on the screen.

Setting TimingUse this code to check the sizes of main memory and page memory.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 92

Page 167: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-617

Print Setting without Department Code (Printer Function)

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

PurposeThis code is used to specify whether or not to accept printing until the department code is registered, when the printer function is used.Printing without registering the department code is performed by default. However, the department code is required once the department management code is registered.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, whether or not to accept printing without registering the department code is reset when the printer function is used.

0: Prints forcibly (Accepts printing without entering the department code.)1: Does not print (Does not accept printing without entering the department code.)* Default: 1

Setting TimingAt the request of a user, use this code to enable printing without entering the department code, when the printer function is used.

CautionThe set value is valid only when the department management function is set to "Valid."

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 93

Page 168: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-618

Default Setting of RADF Original Size (Copy Function)

* This code is valid only when the RADF (Reversing Automatic Document Feeder) is installed.

PurposeMixed original size mode is intended to place originals in different sizes on the RADF, scan and copy them at once. The mixed original size mode is available when the [MIXED SIZE] button is pressed on the control panel. This code is used to specify whether or not to use the mixed original size mode by pri-ority while it is selected by default.

Descriptionhen this code is used, whether or not to use the mixed original size mode by priority is reset.

0: Same size originals (Without [MIXED SIZE] selected)1: Mixed size originals (With only [MIXED SIZE] selected)* Default: 0

Setting TimingAt the request of a user, use this code to select the mixed original size mode by default.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 94

Page 169: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-631

Custom Mode Setting

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

PurposeWhen the “selecting button B” is pressed on the main screen during the copy operation, the copy func-tion registered as a “custom function” is selected. Either of the “FINISHING,” “DUPLEXING,” “2IN1/4IN1,” “IMAGE SHIFT,” “DUAL PAGE” or “ID CARD” function is allocated to this “custom function.”This code is used to specify the copy function, which is allocated as a “custom function.”

DescriptionWhen this code is used, the copy function, which is registered as a custom function, is reset.

0: FINISHING1: DUPLEXING2: 2IN1-4IN13: IMAGE SHIFT4: DUAL PAGE5: ID CARD* Default: 0

* On the e-STUDIO165/e-STUDIO205, the custom function is set according to the following opera-tion:[USER FUNCTIONS] --> [DEFAULT SETTINGS] --> [COPY SETUP] --> [MENU CUSTOMIZE]

Setting TimingAt the request of a user, use this code to reset the custom function.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 95

Page 170: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-638

Time Differences

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

PurposeThis code is used to specify an appropriate time zone of a region, where the equipment is installed, in accordance with UTC (Coordinated Universal Time).The set value is applied to DATE in the header information when e-mail is transmitted or when a fax is transmitted through the Internet.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, the time zone of the region, where the equipment is installed, is reset

0: +12.0 H 16: +4.0 H 32: -4.0 H1: +11.5 H 17: +3.5 H 33: -4.5 H2: +11.0 H 18: +3.0 H 34: -5.0 H3: +10.5 H 19: +2.5 H 35: -5.5 H4: +10.0 H 20: +2.0 H 36: -6.0 H5: +9.5 H 21: +1.5 H 37: -6.5 H6: +9.0 H 22: +1.0 H 38: -7.0 H7: +8.5 H 23: +0.5 H 39: -7.5 H8: +8.0 H 24: 0.0 H 40: -8.0 H9: +7.5 H 25: -0.5 H 41: -8.5 H10: +7.0 H 26: -1.0 H 42: -9.0 H11: +6.5 H 27: -1.5 H 43: -9.5 H12: +6.0 H 28: -2.0 H 44: -10.0 H13: +5.5 H 29: -2.5 H 45: -10.5 H14: +5.0 H 30: -3.0 H 46: -11.0 H15: +4.5 H 31: -3.5 H 47: -11.5 H* Default: JPN (Japan Standard Time): 6

UC (Pacific Standard Time): 40EUR (UTC or Coordinated Universal Time): 24

* The time zone is set on the TopAccess according to the following operation:[Administration] --> [Setup] --> [General] --> [Date & Time]

Setting TimingUse this code, if the time zone is reset because the equipment is relocated to another region.

CautionUse the above default value, unless the equipment is relocated to another region.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 96

Page 171: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-641

Automatic Sorting Mode Setting (When Using ADF/RADF) (Copy Function)

PurposeThis code is used to specify the finishing mode (non-sort, sort and rotate sort), which is displayed as the default on the control panel and used by priority, when the ADF/RADF is used to copy.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, the finishing mode, which is used by priority, is reset when the ADF/RADF is used.

0: Non-sort2: Sort4: Rotate Sort* Default: 2

* “4” can be selected only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Setting TimingAt the request of a user, use this code to reset the finishing mode option, which is used by priority, when the ADF/RADF is used.

CautionThe finishing mode, which is used by priority, is applied, only if an original is placed on the ADF/RADF. Use "Default setting of sorter mode (08-642)" to reset the finishing mode, when the original is placed on the original glass, or when the auto-clear function starts up or the [FUNCTION CLEAR] button is pressed after the original is placed on the ADF/RADF.

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 97

Page 172: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-642

Default Setting of Sorter Mode (Copy Function)

PurposeThis code is used to specify the finishing mode (non-sort, sort and rotate sort), which is displayed as the default on the control panel and used by priority during the copy operation.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, the finishing mode, which is used by priority during the copy operation, is reset.

0: Non-sort1. Group5: Rotate Sort6: Magazine Sort* Default: 1

* “5” and “6” can be selected only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

Setting TimingAt the request of a user, use this code to reset the finishing mode, which is used by priority during the copy operation.

CautionThe finishing mode, which is used by priority, is applied, only if an original is placed on the original glass, or when the [FUNCTION CLEAR] button is pressed or the auto-clear function starts up after the original is placed on the ADF/RADF Use "Automatic sorting mode setting (when using ADF/RADF) (08-641)" to reset the finishing mode, when the original is placed on the ADF/RADF.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 98

Page 173: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-649

Magazine Sort Setting (Copy Function)

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

PurposeThis code is used to specify whether to lay out odd-numbered pages on the right-hand side of the copy set, with characters written horizontally or on the left-hand side, with characters written vertically, when the magazine sort function is used.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, whether to lay out odd-numbered pages on the right-hand side or left-hand side of the copy set is reset when the magazine sort function is used.

0: The odd-numbered pages are laid on the right-hand side1: The odd-numbered pages are laid on the left-hand side* Default: 0

Example: When a 12-page original is magazine sorted<To lay out odd-numbered pages on the right-hand side>

<To lay out odd-numbered pages on the left-hand side>

* The page layout when the magazine sort function is used is set according to the following operation:[USER FUNCTIONS] --> [DEFAULT SETTINGS] --> [COPY SETUP] --> [MAGAZINE SORT]

A book, whose odd-numbered pages are laid on its right-hand side

A book, whose odd-numbered pages are laid on its left-hand side

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 99

Page 174: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

Setting TimingAt the request of a user, use this code to reset the page layout, when the magazine sort function is used.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 100

Page 175: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-650

2-in-1/4-in-1 Page Allocating Order Setting (Copy Function)

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

PurposeThis code is used to specify the page layout, which is displayed as the default on the control panel and used by priority, when the 2-in-1 or 4-in-1 function is used.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, the page layout, which is used by priority, is reset when the 2-in-1 or 4-in-1 function is used.

0: Original with characters written horizontally1: Original with characters written vertically* Default: 0

<Example: When the 2 -in-1 function is used to copy>

<Example: When the 4 -in-1 function is used to copy>

Setting TimingUse this code to reset the page layout, which is used by priority, when the 2-in-1 or 4-in-1 function is used.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

Original with characters written horizontally Original with characters written vertically

Orientation of the originalsCopy image

Original with characters written horizontally Original with characters written vertically

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 101

Page 176: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-655

Reset 05/08 Codes

PurposeThis code is used to reset the set values for 05 ADJUSTMENT codes and 08 SETTING codes (in the PPC FUNC area) to their default values.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, the set values for 05 ADJUSTMENT codes and 08 SETTING codes (in the PPC FUNC area) are reset to their default values.

Setting TimingUse this code to reset the set values for 05 ADJUSTMENT codes and 08 SETTING codes (in the PPC FUNC area) to their default values, after replacing the SRAM board.

Caution• If this code is performed, every set value, which has been adjusted individually at the request of a

user, is reset to its default value. Therefore, carefully perform the setting.• Print the current value for each code in list print mode, and then perform this code. Check the

printed list and enter the set value for each code, in order to restore the set values to the state before this code is performed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 102

Page 177: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-660/661

Auto-Forwarding Setting of Received FAX/E-mail

* These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* These codes are valid only when the Fax Kit, Network Printer Kit, Scanner Upgrade Kit and External

Keyboard are installed.

PurposeAn incoming fax or e-mail image can be forwarded to a client PC by e-mail, transmitted by the Internet FAX, or saved in the shared folder or e-Filing of the equipment, according to the forwarding option entered in [Administration] on the TopAccess.These codes are used to specify whether or not to use the auto-forwarding function.A destination e-mail address to forward the image does not need to be entered in the address book in advance. Instead, a user can select whether to enter the e-mail address directly, or use the address book or the group, in order to set on the TopAccess.

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:

DescriptionWhen these codes are used, whether or not to automatically forward an incoming fax or e-mail is reset.

0: Does not forward1: Automatically forwards* Default: 0

Setting TimingUse these codes to automatically forward an incoming fax or e-mail.

Caution• If forwarding by e-mail or Internet FAX is selected, incoming images are forcibly printed out.• A forwarding destination e-mail address does not need to be entered in the address book in

advance.

Code Applied to08-660 Auto-forwarding setting of received fax08-661 Auto-forwarding setting of received e-mail

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 103

Page 178: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-666

BOX Partition Clearing

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit, Scanner Upgrade Kit and External Keyboard

are installed.

PurposeAn area specifically for storing TWAIN image data captured when the scanner function is used is allo-cated to the CF (Compact Flash) for the Scanner Upgrade Kit.In the event this partition is corrupted for some reason, or in order to forcibly clear the partition, use this code to clear and initialize the partition.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, the partition of the area storing TWAIN image data is cleared.

Setting Timing• Use this code, in the event the BOX partition is corrupted for some reason.• Use this code, in order to clear the BOX partition for some reason.

CautionIf this code is used to initialize the BOX partition, all TWAIN image data, which has been stored, is cleared.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 104

Page 179: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-669

System All Clearing

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

PurposeThis code is used to initialize the adjustment values and set values, which are stored in the SRAM on the Network Printer Kit control board.

Important: Never perform this code. If this code is performed, the value set for the SRAM returns to its default at the start of factory assembly (factory pre-adjustment).

DescriptionNever perform this code.

Setting TimingNone.

CautionNever perform this code.

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 105

Page 180: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-672

Initialization of Department Management Information

PurposeThis code is used to initialize all department management information registered.

* On the e-STUDIO163, information registered when the access code function is used.

* Example of the use of this code:If the memory area storing department management information is corrupted for some accident, "Enter Department Code" appears even if the department management function is not set. In this case, use this code to initialize the area. Department management information is normally initialized at factory shipping.

DescriptionWhen the [START] button is pressed after the value is set, all department management information is initialized.

Setting Timing• Use this code, if "Enter Department Code" appears even if the department management function is

not set. (In the event the area storing the department management information is corrupted.)• Use this code, in order to destroy and initialize all department management information.

Caution• If this code is performed, all department management information registered is cleared. Therefore,

carefully perform the setting.• Do not use this code just to reset the counter for all departments. Instead, reset the counter on the

control panel according to the following operation:[USER FUNCTIONS] --> [DEFAULT SETTINGS] --> [DEPARTMENT CODE] --> key in “1” (depart-ment number for master code) --> [COUNT CLEAR]

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 106

Page 181: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-684/686

Rebuilding Databases

* These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit and Scanner Upgrade Kit are installed.

PurposeThese codes are used to rebuild the databases in the equipment.

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:

DescriptionWhen these codes are used, the databases are rebuilt.

Setting TimingUse these codes to reconfigure or rebuild the databases.

CautionIf these codes are performed, all information in the address book or telephone book is initialized (or cleared). Therefore, carefully perform the setting.

Code Applied to08-684 Rebuilding all databases related to the address book08-686 Rebuilding all databases related to the telephone book

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 107

Page 182: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-685

Duplex Printing by Alternate Circulation

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* This code is valid only when the RADF (Reversing Automatic Document Feeder) is installed.

PurposeThe equipment can print two sheets of paper by alternately circulating them internally, while continu-ously feeding the next sheet without waiting for the one where a copy of one side is made to exit in duplexing mode. This code is used to specify whether or not to enable duplex printing by alternate cir-culation.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, whether or not to enable duplex printing by alternate circulation is reset.

0: Disables1: Enables* Default: 0

Setting TimingUse this code to enable duplex printing by alternate circulation in duplexing mode.

CautionUse the above default value, unless otherwise required.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 108

Page 183: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-690

CF Formatting

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit, Scanner Upgrade Kit and External Keyboard

are installed.

PurposeThis code is used to format the CF (Compact Flash) for the Scanner Upgrade Kit.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, the area storing TWAIN image data, address book data and templates is for-matted and the CF returns to its initial state.

Setting TimingNone.

CautionNever perform this code.

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 109

Page 184: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-691

Template Function Setting

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

PurposeIn scanner mode, when the one-touch buttons from “66” to “75” are allocated for templates and pressed, the templates set on the TopAccess are available. This code is used to specify whether or not to use this template function.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, whether or not to use the template function is reset.

0: Uses1: Does not use* Default: 1

* On the e-STUDIO165/205, the template function is set according to the following operation:[USER FUNCTIONS] --> [INITIAL SETUP] --> [TEMPLATE]

Setting TimingAt the request of a user, use this code to reset the template function.

CautionIf the template function is used, no address can be entered in the telephone book when the one-touch buttons from “66” to “75” are allocated.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 110

Page 185: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-693

Initialization of NIC Information

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

PurposeThis code is used to reset the NIC (Network Interface Card included in the Network Printer Kit control board) to the initial state.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, the NIC is initialized.

Setting TimingUse this code, in the event a NIC malfunction occurs for some reason.

CautionIf this code is performed, all NIC information is initialized. Therefore, it is necessary to reconfigure it.

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 111

Page 186: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-695

Toner Remaining Check Function (Supports Embedded IC chip)

PurposeThis code is used to specify whether or not to detect that the toner cartridge is properly installed, and whether or not to detect that the toner cartridge properly installed is a recommended one.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, whether or not to use the function to check the remaining amount of toner is reset.

0: Does not check1: Checks* Default: CND: 0, Others: 1

Setting TimingAt the request of a user, use this code, in order to use a toner cartridge other than the recommended ones.

CautionIf the set value is reset, the set value for “Toner near empty threshold value (08-971)” is also reset as follows automatically:

• If “0” is set for code 08-695, “3” is set for code 08-971, and the function to detect the remaining amount of toner is turned OFF.

• If “1” is set for code 08-695, “1” is set for code 08-971, and the function to detect the remaining amount of toner is turned ON.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 112

Page 187: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-698

Limit Function for the Number of Paper Exit

PurposeThis code is used to limit the number of paper continuously exits per job, in order to prevent the exit paper from falling out of the exit tray or from jamming when the paper exit is blocked by the paper piled up.If the number of paper continuously exits exceeds the limit number, the equipment suspends opera-tions, lights up or flashes the lamp on the control panel, and displays a message.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, whether or not to use the function to limit the number of paper exits is reset.

0: Does not limit the number of paper exits1: Limits the number of paper exits* Default: 1

* The limit number of paper exits is set for “Limit number setting for paper exit (08-699).”

Setting TimingAt the request of a user, use this code to cancel the limitation on the number of paper exits.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 113

Page 188: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-699

Limit Number Setting for Paper Exit

PurposeThe equipment has the function to limit the number of paper continuously exits per job, in order to pre-vent the exit paper from falling out of the exit tray or from jamming when the paper exit is blocked by the paper piled up.This code is used to set the number of paper continuously exits per job.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, the number of paper continuously exits per job, is specified.

Set value = Limited number of paper

* Acceptable values: 1 to 999* Default: 250 (sheets of paper)

* Whether or not to use the function to limit the number of paper exits is specified for “Limit function for the number of paper exit (08-698).”

Setting TimingAt the request of a user, use this code to reset the limit number of paper exits.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 114

Page 189: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-702/703/707/710/711/715 to 721/723/726 to 730/772/773/780 to 790/796

TOSHIBA Remote Device Management System (RDMS) Related Setting

* These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

PurposeThe "TOSHIBA Remote Device Management System (RDMS)" is a system, which enables remote administration of device information of the equipment via the Internet. These codes are required to enable communications between the "Device Management Portal (DMP)", which is installed over the Internet, and the equipment.The equipment transmits information of each counter type, service call error information, usage condi-tion of supplies, etc. to the DMP. A service administrator can remote control such information by accessing to the DMP.

Description1) RDMS setting

2) Proxy setting (A network environment with the proxy)

Code Description Set value08-702 RDMS Function Setting

If "invalid" is set, device information is not trans-mitted to the DMP (RDMS does not function).

In order to enable this setting, "valid (DMP)" is set at the equipment.0: Valid (DMP), 1: Valid (DMC),2: Invalid* Default: 2

Code Description Set value08-726 HTTP Proxy Setting

This code is used to specify whether or not to enable the proxy setting.

0: Valid, 1: invalid* Default: 1

08-727 HTTP Proxy IP Address SettingThis code is used to enter the IP address obtained from the user.Be sure to enter in "xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx" format.e.g. 192.168.010.001

000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255* Default: 000.000.000.000

08-728 HTTP Proxy Port Number SettingThis code is used to enter the port number obtained from the user.

Acceptable values: 0 to 65535* Default: 0

08-729 HTTP Proxy ID SettingThis code is used to enter the ID obtained from the user.

Maximum 30 letters

08-730 HTTP Proxy Password SettingThis code is used to enter the password obtained from the user.

Maximum 30 letters

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 115

Page 190: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3) RDMS Initial RegistrationPerform the settings for initial registration in order to communicate with the DMP.

4) Periodical communication settingSet the access timing, etc. to the DMP.

Code Description Set value08-718 Remote-controlled Service Initial Registration

This code is used to complete all settings regard-ing the RDMS and set "start" during initial regis-tration.

0: OFF, 1: Start, 2: Only certification is scanned* Default: 0

08-720 Check the status of remote-controlled service ini-tial registration.

0: Not registered, 1: Registered* Default: 0

08-707 Remote-controlled Service initially-registered URLOnly the URL is checked because the URL shown on the right has been entered as the default.

Note: Note: Use the above default value, unless other-wise required.

Maximum 256 letters* Default:

https//device.mfp.support.com: 443/device/community.ashx

08-772 Dealer's Name Maximum 100 letters08-773 DMP Login Name

This code is used to enter the login name obtained from the DMP Management.

Maximum 20 letters

08-719 Tentative PasswordThis code is used to enter the tentative password obtained from the DMP Management.

Maximum 10 letters

Code Description Set value08-703 Remote-controlled Service HTTP Server URL

SettingThis code is used to enter the URL of the DMP obtained from the DMP Management.

Maximum 256 letters

08-710 Recovery Mode Time Setting of Emergency Short Interval Communication ModeRecovery time interval from the emergency to normal mode

Acceptable values: 1 to 48 (hours)* Default: 24 (hours)

08-711 Interval Setting of Emergency Short Interval Communication Mode

Acceptable values: 30 to 360 (minutes)* Default: 60 (minutes)

08-715 Polling Timing SettingThis code is used to set the polling timing.

00:00 to 23:59e.g. Enter "1330" to transmit at 13:30.* Default: 1230

08-716 Remote-controlled Service Self-diagnosis Code Writing

0: Prohibited, 1: Accepted* Default: 0

08-717 Response Waiting Time (Timeout) SettingThis code is used to set the disconnection time of communication when there is no response from the DMP.

Acceptable values: 1 to 30 (minutes)* Default: 3 (minutes)

08-780 Specified Polling Day Selection Day-1 of MonthThis code is used to set the month and day of the polling day.

0: OFF, 1 to 31: 1st to 31st day of a month* Default: 0

08-781 Specified Polling Day Selection Day-2 of MonthThis code is used to set the month and day of the polling day.

0: OFF, 1 to 31: 1st to 31st day of a month* Default: 0

08-782 Specified Polling Day Selection Day-3 of MonthThis code is used to set the month and day of the polling day.

0: OFF, 1 to 31: 1st to 31st day of a month* Default: 0

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 116

Page 191: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

5) Service center call function settingSet the notification method and destination when a service center call error occurs.

Setting TimingUse these codes to remote control information of the equipment using the RDMS.

Caution• Obtain the following information and then use these codes:

Information to be obtained from the DMP Management.- URL of the DMP- HTTP port number of the DMP- URL for DMP initial registration- HTTP port number for DMP initial registration- Login name of the DMP- Login name of the DMP- Tentative password for DMP

Information to be obtained from the user.- IP address of the HTTP proxy server- Port number of the HTTP proxy server- D of the HTTP proxy server- Password for the HTTP proxy server

• Check the date and time, make corrections if necessary, and then use these codes.

08-783 Specified Polling Day Selection Day-4 of MonthThis code is used to set the month and day of the polling day.

0: OFF, 1 to 31: 1st to 31st day of a month* Default: 0

08-784 Specified Polling Day of the Week (Sunday) 0: OFF, 1: ON* Default: 0

08-785 Specified Polling Day of the Week (Monday) Specified Polling Day of the Week (Monday)* Default: 0

08-786 Specified Polling Day of the Week (Tuesday) 0: OFF, 1: ON* Default: 0

08-787 Specified Polling Day of the Week (Wednesday) 0: OFF, 1: ON* Default: 0

08-788 Specified Polling Day of the Week (Thursday) 0: OFF, 1: ON* Default: 0

08-789 Specified Polling Day of the Week (Friday) 0: OFF, 1: ON* 0: OFF, 1: ON

08-790 Specified Polling Day of the Week (Saturday) 0: OFF, 1: ON* Default: 0

08-796 Specified End of Month PollingThis code is used to specify whether or not to poll at the end of the month.

0: OFF, 1: ON* Default: 0

Code Description Set value08-721 Service Center Call 0: Valid, 1: Notifies all, 2: Notifies other

than a jam* Default: 2

08-723 Service Center Call HTTP Server URL SettingWhen a service call error occurs, this code is used to transmit the error content to the specified HTTP server.

Maximum 256 letters* Never change the initial setting

without instructions.

Code Description Set value

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 117

Page 192: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-712/713/714

250 sheets limitation for output pages

* These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

PurposeWhen the printer function or Fax reception function is used to print, these codes are used to limit the number of paper continuously exits per job, in order to prevent the exit paper from falling out of the exit tray or from jamming when the paper exit is blocked by the paper piled up.

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:

DescriptionWhen these codes are used, whether or not to use the function to limit the number of paper exits is reset.

0: Does not limit the number of paper exits1: Limits the number of paper exits* Default: 0

* The limit number of paper exits is set for “Limit number setting for paper exit (08-699).”

Setting TimingAt the request of a user, use these codes to cancel the limitation on the number of paper exits.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

Code Applied to08-712 Function to limit the number of paper continuously exits per print job when the GDI printer

function is used08-713 Function to limit the number of paper continuously exits per print job when the network

printer function is used08-714 Function to limit the number of paper continuously exits per print job when the Fax function

is used

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 118

Page 193: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-767 to 771/775 to 778

Service Notification Function Setting

* These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

PurposeThis equipment installs the "Service Notification Function," which notifies a service engineer of the equipment status (each counter information, service call error information, and PM counter information) by e-mail.These codes are necessary in order to use the service notification function.

Description

Setting TimingUse these codes to automatically notify a service engineer of the equipment status using the service notification function.

CautionThe network setting is necessary in order to send e-mail in advance.

Code Description Set value08-767 Service Notification Setting

* If "Invalid" is set, the service notification func-tion becomes invalid.

0: Invalid, 1: Valid* Default: 0

08-768 Destination E-mail Address 1This code is used to enter a destination e-mail address.* Set values for codes 08-777/778 in the same

manner to designate several addresses.

Maximum 192 letters

08-769 Total Counter Information transmission settingThis code is used to specify whether or not to perform the total counter information transmis-sion.

0: Invalid, 1: Valid* Default: 0

08-770 Total Counter Transmission Interval SettingThis code is used to specify whether or not to perform the total counter transmission on which day of each month.

1 to 31 (1st to 31st day)* Default: 1 (1st day)

08-771 PM Counter Information Transmission SettingThis code is used to specify whether or not to perform the PM counter information transmission.

0: Invalid, 1: Valid* Default: 0

08-775 Error Contents of Equipment Transmission Set-tingThis code is used to specify whether or not to transmit error contents of the equipment.

0: Invalid, 1: Valid* Default: 0

08-776 Setting Total Counter Transmission TimeThis code is used to set the transmission time.

00:00 to 23:59e.g. Enter "1330" to transmit at 13:30.

08-777 Destination E-mail Address 2This code is used to enter a destination e-mail address

Maximum 192 letters

08-778 Destination E-mail Address 3This code is used to enter a destination e-mail address.

Maximum 192 letters

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 119

Page 194: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-805 to 809/814/818/819/826/864 to 867

Main Charger Grid Bias Correction (Copy/Printer/Fax Function)

* Code 08-818 is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

PurposeThese codes are used to correct the printing density, while correcting the main charger grid bias output value, which is adjusted for "Main charger grid bias output adjustment (05-210)" in toner save mode and original mode.A code specifically in transparency film mode is provided other than the validated codes in all modes.

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:

DescriptionWhen these codes are used, the negative DC voltage of the main charger grid bias, which is output from the high-voltage transformer, is reset. As the set value is increased, the main charger grid voltage becomes higher (or more negative) and the main charger voltage potential on the drum surface becomes higher (or more negative). Then the amount of toner attracted onto the latent image, which is formed on the drum, is decreased. This results in the lower printing density.On the other hand, as the set value is decreased, the main charger grid voltage becomes lower and the main charger voltage potential on the drum surface becomes lower (or more neutral). Then the amount of toner attracted onto the latent image, which is formed on the drum, is increased. This results in the higher printing density.The variation in the amount of the main charger grid bias voltage per bit is approximately 3V.

0 to 255 (bit value)* Default: 08-805 to 809/814: 98, 08-818/819/826/864 to 867: 128

Setting Timing• Use these codes to correct the printing density, while correcting the main charger grid bias output

value in each mode.• Use these codes to correct the printing density, while correcting the main charger grid bias output

value specifically in transparency film mode.

Code Applied to Function mode08-805 Main charger bias correction in transparency film mode

(General)Printer (PCL/PS)

08-806 Main charger bias correction in transparency film mode (Toner save mode)

08-814 Main charger bias correction in transparency film mode (GDI)

Printer (GDI)

08-807 Main charger bias correction in transparency film mode (General)

Copy

08-808 Main charger bias correction in transparency film mode (Text)

08-809 Main charger bias correction in transparency film mode (Photo)

08-826 Main charger bias correction (Toner save mode) Printer (PCL/PS)08-864 Main charger bias correction (General)08-819 Main charger bias correction (GDI) Printer (GDI)08-865 Main charger bias correction (General) Copy08-866 Main charger bias correction (Text)08-867 Main charger bias correction (Photo)08-818 Main charger bias correction (Fax) Fax

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 120

Page 195: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

Caution• Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.• Image problems such as a carrier pulling, foggy image may occur, unless "Developer bias correction

(08-833 to 837/840/857 to 863)" are adjusted concurrently with these codes.For example, if the main charger grid bias is corrected to +10 bit (.-30V), the developer bias output needs to be set to +6 bit (.-30V) accordingly.

• Descriptions for codes 08-826/864 to 867 affect transparency film mode. Therefore, set these codes and then use codes 08-805 to 809 specifically in transparency film mode.

• Descriptions for codes 08-814/819 affect the print operation when the GDI printer function is used. Descriptions for codes 08-805/806/826/864 affect the print operation when the PCL/PS printer func-tion (Network Printer Kit) is used.

• Descriptions for code 08-865 affect the test pattern print operation built into the equipment.

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 121

Page 196: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-830/868/869

Transfer DC Correction

PurposeThese codes are used to correct the printing density, while correcting the transfer DC output value, which is adjusted in "Transfer DC output adjustment (05-220 to 222)" at the leading edge, center and trailing edge of paper.

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:

DescriptionWhen these codes are used, the transfer DC output is corrected.As the set value is increased, the transfer current becomes higher (or more positive) and the main charger voltage potential of the paper surface becomes higher (or more positive). The amount of toner transferred from the drum onto the paper is increased and the printing density becomes higher. On the other hand, as the set value is decreased, the transfer current becomes lower. The amount of toner transferred from the drum onto the paper is decreased and the printing density becomes lower.

0 to 255 (bit value)* Default value: 128

Setting TimingUse these codes, if the condition of the transferred image at the leading edge, center and trailing edge is poor due to the paper used or the operating environment.

CautionUse the above default value, unless otherwise required.

Code Applied to08-830 Transfer DC output correction (C), center of paper08-868 Transfer DC output correction (H), leading edge of paper08-869 Transfer DC output correction (L), trailing edge of paper

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 122

Page 197: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-831/870/871

Separation DC Output Correction

PurposeThese codes are used to correct the separation status, while correcting the separation transformer DC output adjusted in "Separation DC output adjustment (05-233 to 235)" at the leading edge, center and trailing edge of paper.

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:

DescriptionAs the set value is increased, the DC voltage becomes higher, and the positive electric charge on paper becomes lower. Then separation becomes easy. On the other hand, as the set value is decreased, the DC voltage becomes lower, and the ratio of positive electric charge on paper to become lower is decreased. Then separation becomes difficult.

* Default value: 128* Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (0: difficult to separate, 255: easy to separate)

Setting TimingUse these codes, if the separation condition is poor, depending on paper being used and environment.

Caution• Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.• Note that when the separation DC output is increased too much, poor transfer (avatar) may occur.• Decrease the separation DC output, if poor transfer (avatar) occurs. Note that when the separation

DC output is decreased too much, paper separation efficiency may be decreased.

Code Applied to08-831 Separation DC output correction (C), center of paper08-870 Separation DC output correction (H), range at approx. 11 mm from the leading edge of

paper08-871 Separation DC output correction (L), ranges at approx. 11 to 46 mm from the leading edge

of paper and at approx. 48 mm from the trailing edge of paper

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 123

Page 198: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-833 to 837/840/857 to 863

Developer Bias Correction (Copy/Printer/Fax Function)

* Code 08-857 is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

PurposeThese codes are used to correct the printing density, while correcting the developer bias output value, which is adjusted in "Developer bias output adjustment (05-205)" in toner save mode and original mode.A code specifically in transparency film mode is provided other than the validated codes in all modes.

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:

DescriptionWhen these codes are used, the negative DC voltage of the developer bias, which is output from the high-voltage transformer, is reset. As the set value is increased, the developer bias output voltage becomes higher (or more negative) and the amount of toner attracted from the developer sleeve (mag-netic roller) onto the latent image, which is formed on the drum, is increased. This results in the higher printing density. On the other hand, as the set value is decreased, the developer bias output voltage becomes lower and the amount of toner attracted onto the latent image, which is formed on the drum, is decreased. This results in the lower printing density.The variation in the amount of the developer bias voltage per bit is approximately 5V.

0 to 255 (bit value)* Default: 08-833 to 837/840: 107, 08-857 to 863: 128

Setting Timing• Use these codes to correct the printing density, while correcting the developer bias output value in

each mode.• Use these codes to correct the printing density, while correcting the developer bias output value

specifically in transparency film mode.

Code Applied to Function mode08-833 Developer bias correction in transparency film mode (General) Printer (PCL/PS)08-834 Developer bias correction in transparency film mode (Toner save

mode)08-840 Developer bias correction in transparency film mode (GDI) Printer (GDI)08-835 Developer bias correction in transparency film mode (General) Copy08-836 Developer bias correction in transparency film mode (Text)08-837 Developer bias correction in transparency film mode (Photo)08-859 Developer bias correction (Toner save mode) Printer (PCL/PS)08-860 Developer bias correction (General)08-858 Developer bias correction (GDI) Printer (GDI)08-861 Developer bias correction (General) Copy08-862 Developer bias correction (Text)08-863 Developer bias correction (Photo)08-857 Developer bias correction (Fax) Fax

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 124

Page 199: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

Caution• Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.• Image problems such as a carrier adhesion, foggy image may occur, unless "Main charger grid bias

correction (08-805 to 809/814/818/819/826/864 to 867)" are adjusted concurrently with these codes.For example, if the developer bias output is set to +6 bit (.-30V), the main charger grid bias needs to be corrected to +10 bit (.-30V) accordingly.

• Descriptions for codes 08-859 to 863 affect transparency film mode. Therefore, set these codes and then use codes 08-833 to 837 specifically in transparency film mode.

• Descriptions for codes 08-840/858 affect the print operation when the GDI printer function is used. Descriptions for codes 08-833/834/859/860 affect the print operation when the PCL/PS printer func-tion (Network Printer Kit) is used.

• Descriptions for code 08-861 affect the test pattern print operation built into the equipment.

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 125

Page 200: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-838

Recycled Toner Saving Control Switching

PurposeThe toner recycling mechanism is installed in the equipment. If the process unit (cleaner and developer unit) becomes hot and toner remains in the transportation path for recycled toner, toner also becomes hot and its performance may degrade. If the drum thermistor detects the hot process unit (40°C or more), another 20 seconds are added to the period for toner transportation, in order to completely transport toner remaining in the transportation path into the developer unit, at the end of printing. Then, the cooling fan rotates for 120 seconds, in order to cool down the transportation path for recycled toner.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, whether or not to use the recycled toner saving control is reset.

0: Enable (Control is enabled.)1: Disable (Control is disabled.)* Default: 0

Setting TimingUse this code to "Disable" the toner saving control, because it is frequently operated.

Caution• Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.• When "Disable" is set, the internal equipment becomes hot due to continuous printing, and toner

degrades in the transportation path for recycled toner by a high temperature. Problems such as a locked transportation area for recycled toner or foggy image may occur.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 126

Page 201: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-839

Correction by Temperature/Humidity

PurposeThe temperature and humidity sensor detects the temperature and humidity of outside air captured in the equipment, in order to prevent print quality from being affected by the temperature and humidity in a location where the equipment is installed. The auto-toner sensor output, transfer DC output, main charger bias, separation DC output, developer bias and laser output are corrected based on the result.This code is used to specify whether or not correct the temperature and humidity on these outputs.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, whether or not correct the temperature and humidity on the auto-toner sensor output, each bias output and laser output is reset.

0: All valid (Collects all)1: All invalid (Does not collect)2: Corrects only the auto-toner sensor output3: All valid except transfer and separation* Default: 0

Setting TimingUse this code to reset temperature and humidity correction items.

CautionUse the above default value, unless otherwise required.

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 127

Page 202: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-872/873/875 to 877/883/884

Laser Power Correction (Copy/Printer/Fax Function)

* Code 08-884 is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

PurposeThese codes are used to adjust the image, while correcting the laser power adjusted in "Laser power adjustment (05-286)" in toner save mode or original mode.

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:

DescriptionAs the set value is increased, the laser output increases and the printing density becomes higher. On the other hand, as the set value is decreased, the laser output decreases and the printing density becomes lower.

0 to 255 (bit value)* Default: 08-872/873/875/876/877: 128, 08-883: 136, 08-884: 110

Setting TimingUse these codes to adjust the image, while correcting the laser power in toner save mode and original mode.

Caution• Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.• Descriptions for code 08-883 affect the print operation when the GDI printer function is used.

Descriptions for codes 08-872/875 affect the print operation when the PCL/PS printer function (Net-work Printer Kit) is used.

• Descriptions for code 08-873 affect the test pattern print operation built into the equipment.

Code Applied to Function mode08-872 Laser output correction (General) Printer (PCL/PS)08-875 Laser output correction (Toner save mode)08-883 Laser output correction (GDI) Printer (GDI)08-873 Laser output correction (General) Copy08-876 Laser output correction (Text)08-877 Laser output correction (Photo)08-884 Laser output correction (Fax) Fax

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 128

Page 203: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-886

Temperature Drop Control Setting in Ready State (Temperature/Time)

PurposeThis code used to set the pattern to control the temperature drop in the ready state. In the control pat-tern, the drop temperature and drop timing to control the temperature drop are set. When this code is used to reset the pattern to control the temperature drop of the fuser unit, inconsistent fusing is avoided.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, the pattern to control the temperature drop (drop temperature, drop timing) in the ready state is reset

0: No temperature drop control1 to 19: Patterns 1 to 1920: Temperature and timing selected optionally* Default: 4

* Set value in the case of inconsistent fusing: 1

* Patterns 2, 3, 5 to 19: No need to use

Setting Timing• Set “1,” if inconsistent fusing occurs when printing is performed after an extended period of time in

the ready state.• Set “20” in order to set the drop temperature and drop timing to control the temperature drop individ-

ually. Then, the set values for the following codes will be valid:Temperature drop setting in ready state (08-404/405)Temperature drop switching time setting in ready state (08-424/425)

Caution• If the set value is reset, offset failure is more likely to occur in the fuser roller. Therefore, carefully

perform the setting.• Make sure that there is no problem with the fuser unit or the equipment, and then reset the set

value.

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 129

Page 204: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-900/906

ROM Version Display

* Code 08-906 is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

PurposeThe electric circuits in the equipment are composed of multiple PC boards, whose roles and operations are different. The CPU and FROM (flash ROM) are mounted on the MAIN board, which plays a critical role. The CPU performs processing, based on the programs written in the ROM. This allows each unit or section in the equipment to be operated. The CPU drive programs on the PFC board are written in the FROM embedded in the CPU, which is mounted on the PFC board, in the same manner. These codes are used to display and check the versions of the programs, which are stored in the flash ROM on each board.

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:

DescriptionWhen these codes are used, the versions of the programs stored in each flash ROM are shown as fol-lows:(X: Major version, Y: Minor version)

08-900:System ROM version (system firmware version):

e-STUDIO163/203:XX-YYY

e-STUDIO165/205:JPN: T208SY0UXXXCND: T208SY0CXXXOthers: T208SY0WXXX

08-906:PFC ROM version: XXX

Setting TimingUse these codes to check the versions of the programs stored in the ROM on each board, after updat-ing the firmware, such as the system firmware and engine firmware.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

Code Applied to08-900 System firmware ROM version display (FROM on the MAIN board)08-906 PFC ROM version display (FROM embedded in the CPU on the PFC board)

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 130

Page 205: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-905

Process for Last Page (one-sided original) at Duplex Copying

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* This code is valid only when the RADF (Reversing Automatic Document Feeder) is installed.

PurposeThis code is used to specify whether to simplex copy the one-sided last page or duplex copy the one-sided last page where a blank page is added to the back of the one-sided last page to handle as an even page original, when an odd page original is duplex copied.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, the method to copy the one-sided last page in duplex copying is specified.

0: Simplex copying1: Duplex copying (Blank page is added)* Default: 0

Setting TimingAt the request of a user, use this code to reset the method to copy the one-sided last page in duplex copying.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 131

Page 206: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-921/1951

FROM Internal Program/ FROM Basic Section Software Version Display

* Code 08-1951 is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* Code 08-1951 is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

PurposeThe FROM (flash ROM), which is mounted on the MAIN board, contains equipment program data. The FROM, which is mounted on the Network Printer Kit control board, contains network-related control (print) programs. These codes are used to display and check the versions of these programs, which are stored in each memory.

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:

DescriptionWhen these codes are used, the versions of the programs stored in each memory are shown as fol-lows:

08-921:Equipment program data version: VTHXX.YYY Z* X: Major version, Y: Minor version

Z: Language code (JPN: J, CND: C, Others: W)

08-1951:CPU version on the Network Printer Kit control board: X.YY/12* X: Major version, Y: Minor version

Setting TimingUse these codes to check the versions of the programs stored in each memory, after updating the sys-tem firmware.

CautionThe following program data are stored in the flash ROM on the MAIN board. Use the following codes to check the versions in 08 SETTING code.• System ROM (system firmware): 08-900• Equipment program data: 08-921• Function table data: 08-922• Language data: 08-923

Code Applied to08-921 Equipment program data version display

08-1951 CPU version display on the Network Printer Kit control board

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 132

Page 207: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-922/923

Function Table Data Version / Language Data Version Display

* These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

PurposeThe FROM (flash ROM), which is mounted on the SYS board, contains function table data and lan-guage data. These codes are used to display and check the versions of these data.

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:

DescriptionWhen these codes are used, the versions of function table data and language data stored in the flash ROM are shown as follows:(X: Version, Z: Language code (JPN: J, CND: C, Others: W))

08-922:Function table data version: T282SY1ZXXX

08-923:Language data version: T282SY2ZXXX

Setting TimingUse these codes to check the versions of the programs stored in the flash ROM on the MAIN board, after updating the system firmware.

CautionThe following program data is stored in the flash ROM on the MAIN board. Use the following codes to check the versions in 08 SETTING code.• System ROM (system firmware): 08-900• Equipment program data: 08-921• Function table data: 08-922• Language data: 08-923

Code Applied to08-922 Function table data version display08-923 Language data version display

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 133

Page 208: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-945

Port 9100 Bi-directional Communication ON/OFF

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

PurposeThe port number 9100 is used to perform Raw TCP printing, when the equipment is used as a network printer. (The port number can be selected for "Raw port number setting (08-1074).") This code is used to specify whether to enable bi-directional communication or one-way (default) communication from a client PC to the equipment, during data transmission through the port number 9100.* Raw TCP/IP printing is available on a client's PC where Windows 2000 or Windows XP (IP-P2P

V3.12 tools, provided by CD for Windows 95/98/Me) is installed. The equipment does not corre-spond to the bi-directional communication. However, this printing is available, if the network admin-istrator permits the Raw TCP connection and validates the Raw TCP printing function at the print service setting. In this case, this code is used to reset the data transmission conditions (bi-direc-tional communication ON/OFF).

DescriptionWhen this code is used, whether or not to enable bi-directional communication through the port number 9100 is reset.

1: ON2: OFF* Default: 2

Setting TimingUse this code to perform bi-directional communication through the port number 9100, when performing Raw TCP printing.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 134

Page 209: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-947

Initialization when Software is Upgraded

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

PurposeThis code is used to perform the necessary initialization of the internal process when software is upgraded for the addition of functions and quality improvement.

DescriptionWhen the code is used, the initialization is performed for additional new functions, when software is upgraded.

Setting TimingUse this code when the software of the equipment is upgraded.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 135

Page 210: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-949

Drum Reverse Rotation Specification Page Setting

PurposeIf poor quality paper, which generates a large amount of paper dust, is used, drum cleaning may be improper carried out due to the paper dust. The equipment pauses printing and rotate the drum in the opposite direction to print large quantities, in order to prevent drum cleaning from being improperly per-formed. This code is used to specify conditions to rotate the drum in the opposite direction.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, the copy count is reset to rotate the drum in the opposite direction.

Set value x 10 pages = Copy count to rotate the drum in the opposite direction

0: Does not rotate the drum in the opposite direction1 to 1000:

Pauses printing and rotates the drum in the opposite direction after printing the specified number of pages (100 to 10,000 pages)

* Default: 0

Setting TimingUse this code, if drum cleaning is improperly carried out due to paper dust.(When cleaning is improperly carried out, clean the cleaning blade and use this code prior to resuming printing.)

CautionUse the above default value, unless otherwise required.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 136

Page 211: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-970

Sound Setting When Switching to Energy Saver Mode

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

PurposeThis code is used to specify whether or not to generate the beep tone when the equipment has been in an idle state for a certain period of time, and switches to energy saver mode.

DescriptionWhen this code used, whether or not to generate the beep tone is reset, when the equipment switches to energy saver mode.

0: OFF (No beep tone is generated.)1: ON (The beep tone is generated.)* Default: JPN: 0, Others: 1

Setting TimingAt the request of a user, use this code to switch whether or not to generate the beep tone when the equipment switches to energy saver mode.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 137

Page 212: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-971

Toner Near Empty Threshold Value

PurposeThis code is used to reset the timing to detect the toner near end condition when the function to detect the remaining amount of toner is used.The function to detect the remaining amount of toner is available only when the recommended toner cartridge is installed.

DescriptionWhen this code used, the timing to detect the toner near end condition is reset.

0: Near empty threshold value (Longer)* The interval between the toner near end condition and toner end condition becomes longer.

1: Near empty threshold value (Center)2: Near empty threshold value (Shorter)

* The interval between the toner near end condition and toner end condition becomes shorter.3: No detection of the toner near end condition

* Default: CND: 3, Others: 1

Setting TimingAt the request of a user, use this code to reset the timing to detect the toner near end condition.

Caution• Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.• If “2” is set, the interval between the toner near end condition and toner end condition becomes

shorter. Therefore, “No Toner” is more likely to be detected before the toner near end condition is detected, due to the variation or difference in the toner remaining in the toner cartridge.

• If the set value for “Toner remaining check function (supports embedded IC chip) (08-695)” is reset, the set value for code 08-971 is also reset as follows automatically:- If “0” is set for code 08-695, “3” is set for code 08-971, and the function to detect the remaining

amount of toner is turned OFF.- If “1” is set for code 08-695, “1” is set for code 08-971, and the function to detect the remaining

amount of toner is turned ON.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 138

Page 213: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-973

PCL Line Feed Code Setting

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

PurposeThis code is used to specify the printer line feed operation corresponding to the line feed code of the printer control language (PCL), when the Network Printer Kit is used to print.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, the feed operation corresponding to the line feed code of the printer control language (PCL) is reset.

0: Auto (Automatically determined)1: CR = CR, LF = LF2: CR = CR + LF, LF = LF3: CR = CR, LF = CR + LF* Default: 0

Setting TimingAt the request of a user, use this code to specify the printer line feed operation corresponding to the line feed code of the printer control language (PCL).

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 139

Page 214: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-995

Equipment Number (Serial Number) Display

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.

PurposeThis code is used to enter the serial number of the equipment.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, a serial number is entered up to 20 digits.

* Default: 0

Setting TimingUse this code to enter the serial number of the equipment.

CautionOnly the numeric values from 0 to 9 and alphabetic characters from A to Z are acceptable.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 140

Page 215: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-1002

Selection of NIC Board Status Information

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

PurposeThis code is used to specify whether or not to print out the NIC status, when the hardware is reset.* At power-on, or when any setting where the initialization of the NIC is required on the control panel

or TopAccess, the hardware is reset.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, whether or not to print out the NIC status is specified, when the hardware is reset.

1: Does not print, when the hardware is reset.2: Prints, when the hardware is reset.* Default: 1

Setting TimingAt the request of a user, use this code to print out the NIC status.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 141

Page 216: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-1003

Ethernet Speed / Communication Speed Setting

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

PurposeThis code is used to specify the Ethernet speed and communication speed, depending on the network environment where the equipment is connected.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, the Ethernet speed and communication speed are specified.

1: Auto2: 10 Mbps Half Duplex3: 10 Mbps Full Duplex4: 100 Mbps Half Duplex5: 100 Mbps Full Duplex* Default: 1

Setting TimingChange the set value from the default, if a network connection cannot be established properly by default (Auto), due to compatibility with a hub.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 142

Page 217: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-1006 to 1010/1112

TCP/IP

* These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

PurposeThese codes are used to enable communications via TCP/IP.TCP/IP needs to be set, in order to use the TopAccess, SMB printing, peer-to-peer printing, LPR print-ing, IPP printing, e-mail transmission and Internet FAX functions.

Description

Setting TimingUse these codes to use the TopAccess, SMB printing, peer-to-peer printing, LPR printing, IPP printing, e-mail transmission and Internet FAX functions.

CautionRefer to "Note" for each code described in the above table in “Description.”

Code Description Set value08-1006 Method of IP Addressing 1: Manual (fixed), 2: Auto (DHCP)

3: Does not handle Auto IP at auto (DHCP)* Default: 2

08-1007 Domain Name Maximum 96 letters08-1008 IP Address

If "1" (Manual (fixed)) is set for code 08-1006, this code is used to enter the IP address of the equipment.

Note: Note: If "2" (Auto (DHCP)) is set for code 08-1006, never reset the set value.(The set value will be bypassed.)

000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255* Default: 000.000.000.000

Enter an IP address in the following format:"xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx"e.g. 192.168.001.010

08-1009 Subnet MaskIf "1" (Manual (fixed)) is set for code 08-1006, this code is used to enter a subnet mask, when necessary.

Note: Note: If "2" (Auto (DHCP)) is set for code 08-1006, never change the set value.(The set value will be bypassed.)

000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255* Default: 000.000.000.000

Enter a subnet mask in the following format:"xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx"e.g. 255.255.255.000

Note: Note: Never set "000.000.000.000" or"255.255.255.255" for a subnet mask. Otherwise, the SMB function will not be available, even if the SMB protocol is enabled.

08-1010 GatewayIf the equipment is used via the router over the network, this code is used to enter a default gateway address.

Note: Note: If "2" (Auto (DHCP)) is set for code 08-1006, never change the set value.(The set value will be bypassed.)

000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255* Default: 000.000.000.000

Enter a gateway address in the following for-mat:"xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx"e.g. 192.168.001.010

08-1112 Host Name Maximum 63 letters* Default: MFP_serial

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 143

Page 218: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-1011/1012

IPX/SPX

* These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

PurposeThese codes are used to enable communications via IPX/SPX.IPX/SPX needs to be set, in order to use the Novell printing functions via IPX/SPX, when the Net-Ware server is used.

Description

Setting TimingUse these codes to use the Novell printing function via IPX/SPX, when the NetWare server is used.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

Code Description Set value08-1011 Availability of IPX

This code is used to specify whether or not to enable IPX/SPX.

1: Available, 2: Not available* Default: 1

08-1012 Network Frame TypeThis code is used to select a network frame type, when necessary.

1: Auto, 2: IEEE 802.3,3: Ethernet II, 4: IEEE 802.3 SNMP,5: IEEE 802.2* Default: 1

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 144

Page 219: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-1013

Availability of NCP Burst

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

PurposeThis code is used to specify whether or not to enable the burst transfer of print data in Novell NCP print-ing.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, whether or not to enable the burst transfer is specified.

1: Enabled2: Disabled* Default: 1

Setting TimingUse this code to improve print performance in the version of Novell NetWare 4.12 or later.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 145

Page 220: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-1014/1015/1103 to 1105

AppleTalk

* These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

PurposeThese codes are used to enable communications via AppleTalk.AppleTalk needs to be set, in order to use the AppleTalk printing functions on a Macintosh-based com-puter.

Description

Setting TimingUse these codes to use the AppleTalk printing functions on a Macintosh-based computer.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

Code Description Set value08-1014 Availability of AppleTalk

This code is used to specify whether or not to enable AppleTalk.

1: Available, 2: Not available* Default: 1

08-1015 Zone Setting of AppleTalkThis code is used to enter a name of a zone where the equipment is connected to, when necessary.If no zone name is entered, the equipment is connected to the default zone "*."

Maximum 32 letters* "* (wild card)" as a default value

08-1103 Validity/Invalidity of RendezvousWhen Rendezvous is selected in the OSX with Web Browser "Safari," the equipment over the network is automatically detected.(The Service Name explained in code "08-1105" is used for automatic detection.) Access to the TopAccess is available by only clicking the equipment name, which is detected.If a number of equipments are connected over the network, a number such as "2", "3", is added to the end of the service name of the 2nd equipment or later on “Safari.”

1: Valid, 2: InvalidDefault: 1

08-1104 Link-Local Host NameThis code is used to enter the equipment name.

Maximum 127 lettersDefault: MFP_serial

08-1105 Service NameThis code is used to enter the service name of the equipment for the Rendezvous func-tion.This service name is used when the Ren-dezvous function is used to search for the equipment over the network.

Maximum 63 lettersDefault:* e-STUDIO163: TOSHIBA e-STUDIO163

e-STUDIO163: TOSHIBA e-STUDIO203e-STUDIO165: TOSHIBA e-STUDIO165e-STUDIO205: TOSHIBA e-STUDIO205

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 146

Page 221: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-1017 to 1019

DNS

* These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

PurposeThese codes are used to set a FQDN name to each server address, when DNS is used.The availability of DNS and the DNS server address need to be set, in order to include the FQDN in the address of the SMTP server (08-1038) or POP3 server (08-1047).

Description

Setting TimingThese codes are used to set a host name for the equipment, when DNS is used.

Caution• To search for the above host name on the DNS server where DNS is set, the target host name

needs to be registered on this DNS server.• For further information regarding the settings on the DNS server, contact a network administrator,

who is responsible for establishing the network environment with the equipment.• A host name is the name expressed after @ and before the following dot "." in the FQDN (e-mail

address) (e.g. [email protected]).

Code Description Set value08-1017 Availability of DNS

This code is used to specify whether or not to enable DNS.

1: Available, 2: Not available* Default: 1

08-1018 IP Address to the primary DNS Server 000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255* Default: 000.000.000.000

Enter an IP address in the following format:"xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx"e.g. 192.168.001.100

08-1019 IP Address to the secondary DNS Server 000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255* Default: 000.000.000.000

Enter an IP address in the following format:"xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx"e.g. 192.168.001.010

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 147

Page 222: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-1020

DDNS Desired Level

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

PurposeThis code is used to enable the dynamic DNS service, if the dynamic DNS is supported on the DNS server.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, whether or not to enable the dynamic DNS service is specified.

1: Invalid2: Via DHCP3: Insecure DDNS4: Secure DDNS5: Multi Secure DDNS* Default: 3

Setting TimingUse this code to reset the dynamic DNS service.

CautionDDNS of the equipment supports only two options, "Via DHCP" and "Insecure DDNS." "Via DHCP" is a function, which uses the DNS registration function (registration function of record A) on the DHCP server. "Insecure DDNS" is intended to register DNS directly on the DNS server. Even if other options ("Secure DDNS" and "Multi Secure DDNS") are selected, they will not function.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 148

Page 223: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-1024/1025

Name of WINS Server

* These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

PurposeThese codes are used to specify an IP address of the WINS server, when the WINS server is used to share a file or printer between different subnets.

Description

Setting TimingUse these codes to share a file or printer between different subnets when the WINS server is used to share a file or printer between different subnets.

CautionRefer to "Note" for each code described in the above table in “Description.”

Code Description Set value08-1024 Name of WINS Server or IP Address (Pri-

mary)This code is used to enter an IP address of the primary WINS server, if the WINS server it is used to provide a NetBios name and workgroup name of the equipment.

Note: Note: If "2" (Auto (DHCP)) is set for code 08-1006, never reset the set value.000.000.000.000" is set by default. If Auto (DHCP) is selected, the address is acquired on the DHCP server. However, if some sort of IP Address is registered, the address cannot be acquired on the DHCP server even if Auto (DHCP) is selected.

Enter an IP address in the following format:"xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx"e.g. 192.168.001.010

Note: Note: Never enter an IP address starting with "0" (e.g. 0.10.10.10) or "244" (e.g. 244.10.10.10).Numeric values are acceptable, but not characters.

08-1025 Name of WINS Server or IP Address (Sec-ondary)This code is used to enter an IP address of the secondary WINS server, if the WINS server is used to provide a NetBios name and workgroup name of the equipment.

Note: Note: If "2" (Auto (DHCP)) is set for code 08-1006, never reset the set value.000.000.000.000" is set by default. If Auto (DHCP) is selected, the address is acquired on the DHCP server. However, if some sort of IP Address is registered, the address cannot be acquired on the DHCP server even if Auto (DHCP) is selected.

Enter an IP address in the following format:"xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx"e.g. 192.168.001.010

Note: Note: Never enter an IP address starting with "0" (e.g. 0.10.10.10) or "244" (e.g. 244.10.10.10).Numeric values are acceptable, but not characters.

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 149

Page 224: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-1026 to 1029

NetWare

* These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

PurposeThese codes are used to establish the Novell printing environment.

Description

Setting TimingUse these codes to establish the Novell printing environment.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

Code Description Set value08-1026 Availability of Bindery

This code is used to specify whether or not to enable Novell printing in NetWare Bindery mode.

1: Available, 2: Not available* Default: 1

08-1027 Availability of NDSThis code is used to specify whether or not to enable Novell printing in NetWare NDS mode.* If "1" (available) is set, perform the set-

tings for codes 08-1028 and 1029.

1: Available, 2: Not available* Default: 1

08-1028 Directory Service ContextThis code is used to enter the NDS context of the NetWare print server for the equip-ment.

Maximum 127 letters

08-1029 Directory Service TreeThis code is used to enter the NDS tree.

Maximum 47 letters

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 150

Page 225: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-1030 to 1032

HTTP

* These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

PurposeThese codes are used to use the Web-based utilities including the TopAccess and e-Filing Web Utility, or to enable the Web-based services such as IPP printing.

Description

Setting TimingUse these codes to:• Use the Web-based utilities including the TopAccess and e-Filing Web Utility.• Enable the Web-based services such as IPP printing.

CautionIf the port number to NIC HTTP server is changed from the default "80," the TopAccess is not available on the Web browser. Therefore, use the above default value, unless otherwise required.

Code Description Set value08-1030 Availability of HTTP Server

This code is used to specify whether or not to enable the HTTP server.

1: Available, 2: Not available* Default: 1

08-1031 Port Number to NIC HTTP ServerThis code is used to enter a port number for HTTP access.Normally, "80" is set.

Note: Note: Use the default value, unless other-wise required.

Acceptable values: 1 to 65535* Default: 80

08-1032 Port Number to System HTTP ServerThis code is used to enter a port number for accessing the Web-based utilities including the TopAccess and e-Filing Web Utility.Normally, "8080" is set.

Acceptable values: 1 to 65535* Default: 8080

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 151

Page 226: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-1037 to 1045/1100 to 1102/1111

SMTP

* These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

PurposeThese codes are used to send and receive faxes through the Internet, when SMTP is used.

Description

Code Description Description08-1037 Availability of SMTP Client

"1" (available) is set to transmit a fax through the Internet from the equipment via the SMTP server.

1: Available, 2: Not available* Default: 1

08-1038 FQDN or IP Address to SMTP ServerThis code is used to enter an IP address of the SMTP server. Or enter the FQDN.

Maximum 128 letters

08-1039 TCP Port Number of SMTP ClientThis code is used to enter a port number for accessing the SMTP server.Normally, "25" is set.

Acceptable values: 1 to 65535* Default: 25

08-1040 Availability of SMTP ServerThis code is used to specify whether or not to use the equipment as the SMTP server."1" (available) is set to use the offramp gate-way function.

1: Available, 2: Not available* Default: 1

08-1041 TCP Port Number of SMTP ServerThis code is used to enter a port number to receive a fax or e-mail through the Internet via the SMTP server.Normally, "25" is set.

Acceptable values: 1 to 65535* Default: 25

08-1042 E-mail Box Name to SMTP ServerThis code is used to enter an e-mail address assigned to the equipment.

Maximum 192 letters

08-1043 Availability of OfframpThis code is used to specify whether or not to enable the offramp gateway transmission.

1: Available, 2: Not available* Default: 2

08-1044 Offramp SecurityThis code is used to specify whether or not to enable the offramp gateway security.If "1" (available) is set, the offramp gateway transmission is applied only to the fax num-ber registered in the address book of the equipment.

1: Available, 2: Not available* Default: 1

08-1045 Printing at OfframpThis code is used to specify whether or not to print a document forwarded, when the offramp gateway function is used.

1: Prints, 2. Does not print* Default: 1

08-1100 SMTP authentication system 1: Plain, 2: Login, 3: Digest MD5,4: Disable* Default: 4

08-1101 Login Name for SMTP AuthenticationThis code is used to enter the login name for the equipment to access to the STMP server.

Maximum 64 letters

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 152

Page 227: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

Setting TimingUse these codes to send and receive faxes through the Internet, when SMTP is used.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

08-1102 Login Password for SMTP AuthenticationThis code is used to enter the password for the equipment to access to the SMTP server.

Maximum 64 letters

08-1111 Validity/Invalidity of POP before SMTPThis code is used to select whether or not to transmit e-mail after the authentication by POP is performed.If "valid" is selected, unauthorized e-mail transmission and disrupt can be prevented.

1: Available, 2: Not available* Default: 4

Code Description Description

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 153

Page 228: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-1046 to 1052/1097/1098

POP3

* These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

PurposeThese codes are used to receive a fax through the Internet or an e-mail print job, when POP3 is used.

Description

Setting TimingUse these codes to receive a fax or an e-mail print job through the Internet, when POP3 is used.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

Code Description Set value08-1046 Availability of POP3 Clients

This code is used to specify whether or not to enable the POP3 client function."1" (available) is set to retrieve a fax through the Internet on the POP3 server.

1: Available, 2: Not available* Default: 1

08-1047 FQDN or IP Address to POP3 ServerThis code is used to enter an IP address of the POP3 server.Or enter the FQDN.

Maximum 128 letters

08-1048 Types of POP3 serverThis code is used to select a type of login to the POP3 server.

1: Auto, 2: POP, 3: APOP* Default: 1

08-1049 Login Name to POP3 ServerThis code is used to enter a login name, allowing the equipment to access the POP3 server.

Maximum 96 letters

08-1050 Login Password to POP3 ServerThis code is used to enter a password, allowing the equipment to access the POP3 server.

Maximum 96 letters

08-1051 E-mail Reception IntervalThis code is used to specify an interval until the equipment accesses the POP3 to check presence of incoming messages.

Acceptable values: 0 to 4096 (0 to 4096 min-utes)* Default: 5 (minutes)

08-1052 TCP Port Number of POP3 ServerThis code is used to enter a port number for accessing the POP3 server.Normally, "110" is set.

Acceptable values: 1 to 65535* Default: 110

08-1097 Number of Text Print Pages Control of E-mail ReceptionThis code is used to set the maximum num-ber of pages of e-mail text to print.

Acceptable values: 1 to 99 (1 to 99 pages)* Default: 5 (pages)

08-1098 MDN Reply at E-mail ReceptionThis code is used to select whether or not to automatically return a message, when e-mail is received.

1: Available, 2: Not available* Default: 2

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 154

Page 229: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-1055

FTP

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

PurposeThis code is used to send and receive data between the equipment and a computer over the network.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, a port number for accessing the FTP client is entered.

* Default: 21* Acceptable values: 1 to 65535

Setting TimingUse this code to send and receive data between the equipment and a computer over the network.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 155

Page 230: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-1063/1065/1066/1069/1070/1099

SNMP

* These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

PurposeThese codes are used to monitor a status of the equipment, when the SNMP network monitoring utility is used.

Description

Setting TimingUse these codes to monitor a status of the equipment, when the SNMP network monitoring utility is used.

Code Description Set value08-1063 MIB Function

This code is used to specify whether or not to enable the MIB function."1" (available) is set to permit a user to use the TopAccess, DocMon, TWAIN driver, File Downloader and Address Book Viewer.

1: Available, 2: Not available* Default: 1

08-1065 Setting of Read CommunityThis code is used to enter a trap community name for the SNMP trap.

Maximum 31 letters* Default: public

08-1066 Setting of Read/Write CommunityThis code is used to enter a private commu-nity name, which permits reading and writing through SNMP communication.

Maximum 31 letters* Default: private

08-1069 TRAP Destination IP addressThis code is used to enter an IP address where the SNMP trap is sent.

000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255* Default: 000.000.000.000Enter an IP address in the following format:"xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx"e.g. 192.168.001.010

08-1070 Community Setting of TRAPThis code is used to enter a trap community name for the IP trap.

Maximum 31 letters* Default: public

08-1099 IPX TRAP Destination Maximum 24 lettersLetters from 0 to F are valid (0 to 9, A to F).The address is expressed as "n.n.n.n:m-m-m-m-m-m:oo" and each letter is 1 byte (2 letters).It is not required to separate each letters by "." (dot), ":" (colon), and "-" (hyphen).Each "n" is 1-byte data in binary, and indicates the IPX Network Address.Each "m" is 1-byte data in binary, and indicates the MacAddress."oo" is 2-byte data in binary, and indicates the socket number.

e.g.000000010040af7db4b80001Enter 12 bytes (24 letters), from 0 to F as shown above.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 156

Page 231: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 157

Page 232: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-1073/1074

Raw TCP Print

* These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

PurposeThese codes are used to perform Raw TCP printing.

Description

Setting TimingUse these codes to perform Raw TCP printing.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

Code Description Set value08-1073 Availability of Raw TCP

This code is used to specify whether or not to enable Raw TCP printing.

1: Available, 2: Not available* Default: 1

08-1074 TCP Port Number of RawThis code is used to enter a port number for Raw TCP printing.Normally, "9100" is set.

Acceptable values: 1 to 65535* Default: 9100

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 158

Page 233: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-1075 to 1077

LPD Print

* These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

PurposeThese codes are used to perform LPD (LPR) printing.

Description

Setting TimingUse these codes to perform LPD (LPR) printing.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

Code Description Set value08-1075 Availability of LPD Client

This code is used to specify whether or not to enable LPD printing.

1: Available, 2: Not available* Default: 1

08-1076 TCP Port Number of LPDThis code is used to enter a port number for LPD printing.Normally, "515" is set.

Acceptable values: 1 to 65535* Default: 515

08-1077 LPD Queue NameThis code is used to enter an LPD queue name.

Maximum 31 letters

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 159

Page 234: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-1078 to 1088

IPP Print

* These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

PurposeThese codes are used to permit a user to perform IPP printing.

Description

Code Description Set value08-1078 Availability of IPP

This code is used to specify whether or not to enable IPP printing.

1: Available, 2: Not available* Default: 1

08-1079 Availability of IPP Port Number "80"This code is used to specify whether or not to enable port 80 in IPP printing.Normally, port 631 is used for IPP access.In this case, a user needs to specify the IPP port number for an URL. Once "1" (avail-able) is set, IPP access via port 80, which is a standard port for HTTP access, is permit-ted. Therefore, an IPP port number does not need to be specified for an URL any more.

1: Available, 2: Not available* Default: 1

08-1080 TCP Port Number of IPPThis code is used to enter a port number for IPP printing.Normally, "631" is set.

Acceptable values: 1 to 65535* Default: 631

08-1081 IPP Printer NameThis code is used to enter a name of the IPP printer.

Maximum 127 letters

08-1082 IPP Printer LocationThis code is used to enter a location to install the equipment.

Maximum 127 letterse.g. If the equipment is installed Room 123 on the second floor in Building A, enter "A-2F-Room No. 123."

08-1083 IPP Printer InformationThis code is used to enter any information regarding the equipment.

Maximum 127 letters

08-1084 IPP Printer Information (More)This code is used to enter the URL of the website, where further information regarding the equipment is introduced.

Maximum 127 letters* Default:

http://www.e-studioseries.com/

08-1085 Installer of IPP Printer DriverIPP is capable of automatically installing the printer driver, when a URL of a location where the printer driver installer is retrieved is entered. But the equipment does not sup-port this function.

Maximum 127 letters

08-1086 IPP Printer "Make and Model"This code is used to enter a manufacturer name of the equipment.

Maximum 127 letters* Default: TOSHIBA Corporation

08-1087 IPP Printer Information (More) MFGRThis code is used to enter a URL of the web-site, where further information regarding a manufacturer of the equipment is intro-duced.

Maximum 127 letters* Default:

http://www.e-studioseries.com/

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 160

Page 235: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

Setting TimingUse these codes to permit a user to perform IPP printing.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

08-1088 IPP Message from OperatorThis code is used to enter messages that an operator or system administrator generates in order to indicate the printer information or status.

Maximum 127 lettersCode Description Set value

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 161

Page 236: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-1093 to 1096

NetWare Print

* These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

PurposeThese codes are used to permit a user to perform Novell printing.

Description

Setting TimingUse these codes to permit a user to perform Novell printing.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

Code Description Set value08-1093 Login Name to Novell Print Server

This code is used to enter a print server name cre-ated on the NetWare file server.

Maximum 47 letters

08-1094 Login Password to Novell Print ServerThis code is used to enter a login password speci-fied on the print server, when necessary.

Maximum 31 letters

08-1095 Name of Search Root ServerThis code is used to enter a name of the NetWare file server.

Maximum 31 letters

08-1096 Scan Rate Setting of Print Queue Acceptable values: 1 to 255 (1 to 255 seconds)* Default: 5 (seconds)

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 162

Page 237: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-1114

Text Transmission of Internet FAX

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

PurposeThis code is used to specify whether or not to permit the transmission of text, when a fax is transmitted through the Internet from the equipment.There are two types of text transmitted, information, which equipment provides such as dates and page numbers, and text, which a user enters on the control panel.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, whether or not to permit the transmission of text is reset, when a fax is trans-mitted through the Internet.

0: Invalid (Does not transmit text)1: Valid (Transmits text)* 1: Valid (Transmits text)

Setting TimingAt the request of a user, use this code to disable the transmission of text, when a fax is transmitted through the Internet.

Caution• If Invalid is set, information such as dates and page numbers, which the equipment provides auto-

matically, is not transmitted.• Even if "0" (Invalid) is set, a user can enter text on the control panel. However, this text is not trans-

mitted.

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 163

Page 238: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-1123

NT Domain ON/OFF Setting

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

PurposeTo participate in a Windows NT network domain or the Windows Server 2000/2003 Active Directory, the NT domain needs to be enabled. However, only the workgroup is supported for the time being.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, whether or not to enable the NT domain is reset.Turn the main switch of the equipment ON and start Samba to allow the equipment to participate in the workgroup.

3: NT domain ON (Domain selected)* Workgroup enabled (The domain setting is disabled for the time being.)

4: NT domain OFF (Workgroup selected)* Workgroup enabled

* Default: 4

Setting TimingAt the request of a user, use this code to participate in a Windows NT network domain or Windows Server 2000/2003 Active Directory.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 164

Page 239: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-1124

Workgroup Name

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

PurposeThis code is used to specify a name of the workgroup, which the equipment belongs to, in order to be a member of the group present on the Windows network.

DescriptionThis code is used to enter a name of the workgroup.Turn the main switch of the equipment ON and start Samba to allow the equipment to be a member of the specified workgroup.

Set value = Name of workgroup

Up to 15 characters (ASCII)* Default: workgroup

Setting TimingAt the request of a user, use this code to specify a name of the workgroup, which the equipment belongs to, in order to be a member of the group present on the Windows network.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 165

Page 240: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-1141

Display of MAC Address

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

PurposeThis code is used to display the Media Access Control (MAC) address of the equipment.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, the MAC address is displayed.

e.g.**:**:**:**:**:**6-byte data is divided into colon-delimited 2-byte blocks.

Setting TimingUse this code to check the MAC address.

CautionMake sure that the MAC address has been correctly registered, if the Network Printer Kit is replaced, and then the serial number of the equipment is entered.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 166

Page 241: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-1144

Processing in the event of Memory Full Error

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit, Scanner Upgrade Kit and External Keyboard

are installed.

PurposeThis code is used to specify the method of processing data (pages), which have been scanned, if the amount of data exceeds the memory capacity during the scan operation.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, the method of processing pages, which have been scanned, is reset, in the event of a memory full error.

0: Transfers scanned pages1: Deletes scanned pages* Default: 0

Setting TimingAt the request of a user, use this code to reset the method in order to delete data, which have been scanned, in the event of a memory full error.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 167

Page 242: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-1149

Enhanced Bold for PCL6

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

PurposeThis code is used to make bold text much thicker, when PCL6 is used to print.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, whether or not to make bold text much thicker is reset.

0: OFF1: ON* Default: 0

Setting TimingUse this code, if bold text is not sufficiently printed in bold type.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 168

Page 243: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-1372

Heater and Energizing Time Accumulating Counter Display / 0 Cleaning

PurposeThis code is used to count up the heater control time (accumulated time at power-on of the equipment) but not in sleep mode. If "0" is set, the counter is reset.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, the heater control time (accumulated time at power-on of the equipment) is shown up to an 8-digit numeric value. Set "0" to reset the counter.

0 to 99999999 (hours)* Default: 0

Setting Timing• To display the heater control time (accumulated time at power-on of the equipment).• To reset the counter to "0."

CautionIf “0” is set, “0” is also automatically set for codes 08-1378/1380/1382.

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 169

Page 244: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-1378

Fuser Roller Ready Temperature Time Accumulating Counter / 0 Cleaning

PurposeThis code is used to count up the heater control time (accumulated time in the ready state). If "0" is set, the counter is reset.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, the heater control time (accumulated time in the ready state) is shown up to an 8-digit numeric value. Set "0" to reset the counter.

0 to 99999999 (1 count = 2 sec.)* Default: 0

Setting Timing• To display the heater control time (accumulated time in the ready state).• To reset the counter to "0."

CautionIf “0” is set, “0” is also automatically set for codes 08-1372/1380/1382.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 170

Page 245: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-1380

Fuser Roller Printing Temperature Time Accumulating Counter / 0 Cleaning

PurposeThis code is used to count up the heater control time (accumulated time during printing). If "0" is set, the counter is reset.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, the heater control time (accumulated time during printing) is shown up to an 8-digit numeric value. Set "0" to reset the counter.

0 to 99999999 (1 count = 2 sec.)* Default: 0

Setting Timing• To display the heater control time (accumulated time during printing).• To reset the counter to "0."

CautionIf “0” is set, “0” is also automatically set for codes 08-1372/1378/1382.

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 171

Page 246: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-1382

Fuser Roller Energy Saving Temperature Time Accumulating Counter Display / 0 Clearing

PurposeThis code is used to count up the heater control time (accumulated time in energy saver mode). If "0" is set, the counter is reset.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, the heater control time (accumulated time in energy saver mode) is shown up to an 8-digit numeric value. Set "0" to reset the counter.

0 to 99999999 (1 count = 2 sec.)* Default: 0

Setting Timing• To display the heater control time (accumulated time in energy saver mode).• To reset the counter to "0."

CautionIf “0” is set, “0” is also automatically set for codes 08-1372/1378/1380.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 172

Page 247: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-1385/1386/1388

Fuser Roller Paper Type Output Page Number Counter / 0 Cleaning

PurposeThese codes are used to count up the number of output pages by paper type at power-on of the regis-tration sensor. If "0" is set, the counter is reset.

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:

DescriptionWhen these codes are used, the number of output pages by paper type is shown up to an 8-digit numeric value. Set "0" to reset the counter.

0 to 99999999 (pages)* Default: 0

Setting Timing• To display the accumulated number of output pages by paper type.• To reset the counter to "0."

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

Code Applied to08-1385 Thick paper 1 mode, copy counts08-1386 Thick paper 2 mode, copy counts08-1388 Transparency film mode, copy counts

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 173

Page 248: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-1410

Toner Cartridge Driving Time Counter

PurposeThis code is used to display the toner cartridge driving time accumulated after a toner cartridge is sup-plied.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, the toner cartridge driving time is shown up to an 8-digit numeric value.

The display is updated as follows:* The counter value stored in the IC chip on the toner cartridge board is read and updated at power

ON or when the front cover is closed.* The driving time is calculated and updated when a toner cartridge is driven through printing.

(Data is written into the IC chip when printing is completed.)

0 to 99999999 (1 count = 1 sec.)* Default: 0

Setting TimingUse this code to display the current toner cartridge driving time.

CautionThe counter value is stored in the IC chip on the toner cartridge board. The counter value g0h has been written into the IC chip for a new toner cartridge; therefore, it is not necessary to use this code to reset the counter value to g0,h after replacing a toner cartridge.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 174

Page 249: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-1428

Forcible SRAM Backup Data All Clearing

PurposeThis code is used to clear all remaining data on the SRAM.This code is performed in order to prevent data leak when the MAIN board is disposed of.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, all remaining data on the SRAM is cleared.

Setting TimingUse this code to dispose of the MAIN board (to replace the broken MAIN board, or to dispose of the equipment).

Caution• When this code is performed, the equipment cannot be started up unless the MAIN board is

replaced. Therefore, never perform this code other than when disposing of the MAIN board.

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 175

Page 250: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-1440

IP Conflict Detect

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

PurposeThis code is used to specify whether or not to initialize and take over network-related settings during the update.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, whether or not to enable initialization and takeover of network-related settings is reset.

0: Valid1: Invalid* Default: 1

Setting TimingUse this code to forcibly operate the network printer controller, even if an IP collision occurs when ARP is used.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 176

Page 251: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-1447

IPP admin Name

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

PurposeThis code is used to display the name of the user who has the authority to control all IPP jobs.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, the name of the user who has the authority to control IPP jobs is displayed.

Setting TimingUse this code to check the name of the user who has the authority to control IPP jobs.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 177

Page 252: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-1448

IPP admin Password

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

PurposeThis code is used to display the user password for the authority to control all IPP jobs.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, the user password for the authority to control IPP jobs is displayed.

Setting TimingUse this code to check the user password for the authority to control IPP.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 178

Page 253: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-1449

IPP authentication method

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

PurposeThis code is used to specify whether or not to perform authentication, and also the method to perform authentication, when the IPP port is created.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, the method to perform authentication is reset when the IPP port is created.

1: Disabled2: Basic3: Digest4: Basic Digest* Default: 1

Setting TimingUse this code to create the IPP port on the PC.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 179

Page 254: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-1450

User name for IPP authentication

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

PurposeThis code is used to display the user name to perform authentication, when the IPP port is created on the client.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, the user name to perform authentication is displayed when the IPP port is cre-ated on the client.

Setting TimingUse this code to check the user name to perform authentication, when the IPP port is created on the cli-ent.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 180

Page 255: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-1451

Password for IPP authentication

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

PurposeThis code is used to display the user password to perform authentication, when the IPP port is created on the client.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, the user password to perform authentication is displayed when the IPP port is created on the client.

Setting TimingUse this code to check the user password to perform authentication, when the IPP port is created on the client.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 181

Page 256: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-1628

Drum Life Correction Switching of the Drum Reverse/Forward Rotation Amount

PurposeThis code is used to additionally correct the amount of reverse and forward rotation of the drum during cleaning, when a certain amount or more of paper is fed, to thoroughly clean the drum, even if poor quality paper, which generates a large amount of paper dust, is used.If the drum is rotated too much in reverse when the drum or recovery blade is in the initial state (standby position), the recovery blade is more likely to curl up. Therefore, apply an additional correction, only if a certain amount or more of paper is fed. As the amount of reverse rotation is larger, toner is more likely to spill from the drum cleaner. The drum is rotated in reverse and forward with the same amount of rota-tion, and then stops.

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:

DescriptionWhen this code is used, the amount of additional correction for the amount of rotation of the drum dur-ing cleaning is adjusted.

Set value x 10m sec. = Drum rotation time

0: Not corrected1 to 15: Corrected (10 to 150m sec.: approx. 0.9 to 13.5 mm)* Default: 08-1628-0: 4, 08-1628-1: 9

* The correction distance is not constant due to the driving rattle or error when the motor starts up, to switch the rotation direction of the main motor.

Setting Timing• If toner spills from the drum cleaner. (Set a smaller value.)• If the main motor is replaced with a different type of main motor.

Caution• Use the above default value, unless otherwise required.• Change the amount of both reverse and forward rotation, to change this set value. If the amount of

forward rotation is larger than that of reverse rotation, an unusual noise may occur. Therefore, never make the amount of forward rotation larger than that of reverse rotation.

Code Sub code Applied to08-1628 0 Drum life correction of the reverse rotation amount

1 Drum life correction of the forward rotation amount

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 182

Page 257: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-1882

Initialization of the Scan Memory Area

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit, Scanner Upgrade Kit and External Keyboard

are installed.

PurposeThis code is used to initialize the memory area storing scanned-in data.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, the area storing scanned-in data is initialized.

Setting TimingUse this code to initialize the area storing scanned-in data for some reason.

CautionIf this code is used to initialize the memory area, all scanned-in data is cleared.

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 183

Page 258: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-1913

Function Clear LED Flashing

PurposeThis code is used to specify whether or not to flash the reset light, if the copy function setting is different from the default after the copy operation ends. The reset light flashes until the specified function is cleared (the [FUNCTION CLEAR] button is pressed or the auto-clear function starts up).

DescriptionWhen this code is used, whether or not to flash the reset light is reset after the copy operation ends.

0: Invalid (Always OFF)1: Valid* Default: 1

Setting TimingAt the request of a user, use this code to stop the reset light flashing.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 184

Page 259: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-1952 to 1955

Controller ROM / Scanner ROM Program Version Display

* These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

PurposeThe FROM (flash ROM), which is mounted on the Network Printer Kit control board, contains the con-troller ROM, which is used for controlling the Network Printer Controller. The CF (Compact Flash) for the Scanner Upgrade Kit contains the scan ROM for controlling the Scanner Upgrade Kit. These codes are used to display and check the versions of these data.

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:

DescriptionWhen these codes are used, the versions of the data stored in each memory are shown as follows:

08-1952:Program version: T282CN0XXXX* X: Version

08-1953:Program version: T282SC0XXXX* X: Version

08-1954/1955:Internal program version: VTCXX.YYYZ.* X: Major version, Y: Minor version

Z: Language code (EUR: E, JPN: J, UC: U)

* Descriptions for codes 08-1954 and 08-1955 are the same.

Setting TimingUse these codes to check the version of the programs stored in each memory, after updating the con-troller ROM or scan ROM.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

Code Applied to08-1952 Controller ROM program version display08-1953 Scanner ROM program version display08-1954 Controller ROM internal program version display08-1955 Scanner ROM internal program version display

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 185

Page 260: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-1960 to 1979

IP Address Range for IP Filter

* These codes are available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* These codes are valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

PurposeThese codes are used to accept only the print jobs within the IP address range specified for printing.

The table below shows the setting codes and their applications:

DescriptionWhen these codes are used, each minimum IP address and each maximum IP address of ten areas are entered.

000.000.000.000 to 255.255.255.255* Default: 000.000.000.000

Setting TimingUse these codes to limit the users who can use the print function according to the IP address.

Caution• If 0.0.0.0 is entered in both ranges of the paired minimum area and maximum area, this function is

disabled.• This function does not affect Samba printing and Point & Print.

Code Applied to08-1960 IP address range for IP filter (Minimum area 1)08-1961 IP address range for IP filter (Maximum area 1)08-1962 IP address range for IP filter (Minimum area 2)08-1963 IP address range for IP filter (Maximum area 2)08-1964 IP address range for IP filter (Minimum area 3)08-1965 IP address range for IP filter (Maximum area 3)08-1966 IP address range for IP filter (Minimum area 4)08-1967 IP address range for IP filter (Maximum area 4)08-1968 IP address range for IP filter (Minimum area 5)08-1969 IP address range for IP filter (Maximum area 5)08-1970 IP address range for IP filter (Minimum area 6)08-1971 IP address range for IP filter (Maximum area 6)08-1972 IP address range for IP filter (Minimum area 7)08-1973 IP address range for IP filter (Maximum area 7)08-1974 IP address range for IP filter (Minimum area 8)08-1975 IP address range for IP filter (Maximum area 8)08-1976 IP address range for IP filter (Minimum area 9)08-1977 IP address range for IP filter (Maximum area 9)08-1978 IP address range for IP filter (Minimum area 10)08-1979 IP address range for IP filter (Maximum area 10)

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 186

Page 261: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-1989

Enabling Server's IP Address acquired by DHCP The Domain Name Server Option (6)

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

PurposeThis code is used to specify whether or not to automatically acquire the address of the domain name server under the environment where the DHCP server is used.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, whether or not to automatically acquire the address of the domain name server is reset under the environment where the DHCP server is used.

1: Enabled2: Disabled* Default: 1

Setting TimingThe condition where the domain name server option (6) is set for the DHCP server under the environ-ment where the DHCP server is used is provided. Use this code to set “Enabled” to acquire the address from the DHCP server.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 187

Page 262: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-1990

Enabling Server's IP Address acquired by DHCP The NetBIOS over TCP/IP Name Server Option (44) = Primary and Secondary WINS Name

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

PurposeThis code is used to specify whether or not to automatically acquire the address of the WINS (Windows Internet name service) under the environment where the DHCP server is used.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, whether or not to automatically acquire the address of the WINS is reset under the environment where the DHCP server is used.

1: Enabled2: Disabled* Default: 1

Setting Timinghe condition where the WINS server option (44) is set for the DHCP server under the environment where the DHCP server is used is provided. Use this code to set “Enabled” to acquire the address from the DHCP server.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 188

Page 263: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-1991

Enable Serverfs IP Address acquired by DHCP The Host Name Vender Extension Option (12)

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

PurposeThis code is used to specify whether or not to automatically acquire the Host Name of the equipment under the environment where the DHCP server is used.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, whether or not to automatically acquire the Host Name of the equipment from the DHCP server is reset.

1: Enabled (Automatically acquires)2: Disabled (Does not automatically acquire)* Default: 2

Setting TimingUse this code to manage the Host Name of the equipment in the DHCP server.

CautionCurrently, no unique Host Name can be set in Windows 2000 and Windows Server 2003. Therefore, it is recommended to ignore this code.

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 189

Page 264: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-1993

Enable Server’s IP Address acquired by DHCP The Simple Main Server Option (69) Simple Mail Server Address

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

PurposeThis code is used to specify whether or not to automatically acquire the address of the SMTP server under the environment where the DHCP server is used.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, whether or not to automatically acquire the address of the SMTP server from the DHCP server is reset.

1: Enabled (Automatically acquires)2: Disabled (Does not automatically acquire)* Default: 2

Setting TimingUse this code to acquire the address of the SMTP server from the DHCP server.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 190

Page 265: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

3

08-1994

Enable Server’s IP Address acquired by DHCP The POP3 Server Option (70) Post Office Server Address

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

PurposeThis code is used to specify whether or not to automatically acquire the address of the POP3 under the environment where the DHCP server is used.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, whether or not to automatically acquire the address of the POP3 is reset under the environment where the DHCP server is used.

1: Enabled2: Disabled* Default: 2

Setting TimingThe condition where the POP3 server option (70) is set for the DHCP server under the environment where the DHCP server is used is provided. Use this code to set “Enabled” to acquire the address from the DHCP server.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

© 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08

3 - 191

Page 266: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference

08-1996

Enable Server’s IP Address acquired by DHCP The SNTP Server Option (42) SNTP Server Address

* This code is available only for the e-STUDIO165/205.* This code is valid only when the Network Printer Kit is installed.

PurposeThis code is used to specify whether or not to automatically acquire the address of the SNTP under the environment where the DHCP server is used.

DescriptionWhen this code is used, whether or not to automatically acquire the address of the SNTP is reset under the environment where the DHCP server is used.

1: Enabled2: Disabled* Default: 2

Setting TimingThe condition where the SNTP server option (42) is set for the DHCP server under the environment where the DHCP server is used is provided. Use this code to set “Enabled” to acquire the address from the DHCP server.

CautionNo particular caution needs to be followed.

e-STUDIO163/165/203/205 Code in Setting Mode 08 © 2006 TOSHIBA TEC CORPORATION All rights reserved

3 - 192

Page 267: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference
Page 268: Toshiba E-Studio 163-165-203 Code Technical Reference